Monthly Archives: April 2023

How wide is a 70 inch tv: 70 inch TV dimensions – TV Specs

Опубликовано: April 20, 2023 в 4:36 pm

Автор:

Категории: Miscellaneous

How Wide Is A 70 Inch TV?

Our posts contain affiliate links. Sometimes, not always, we may make $$ when you make a purchase through these links. No Ads. Ever. Learn More

Table of Contents_

  • 70 Inch TV Dimensions
  • 70 Inch TV Viewing Distance
  • Resolution on the 70-Inch TV
  • FHD 70-Inch TVs
  • 70 Inch 4K UHD TVs
  • 70 Inch 8K UHD TVs
  • F.A.Q.

Consumers looking to buy the best TV in the market may ask how wide is a 70-inch TV. To understand the height and width, you have to know that the 70” size covers the diagonal of the screen. This measurement may seem counter-intuitive because most things are represented by height or width. However, many electronics with screens are measured the same way. Additionally, consumers may wonder what features are available on a 70-inch TV.

KEY TAKEAWAYS:

  • The height of a 70-inch TV screen is about 34.3 inches, while the width is about 61 inches.
  • You should sit about 9. 8 feet away from the screen of a 70-inch TV.
  • Many 70-inch TVs feature higher resolutions than TVs of the past, including FHD, 4K, and 8K resolutions.

When calculating the dimensions of a 70-inch TV screen, you could use a system of formulas outlined on various websites only. These formulae include algebra, using the Pythagorean Theory, or trigonometry, which is based upon angles. You would also have to know that the most common aspect ratio for widescreen TVs is 16:9 units. However, you can most likely find this information in the form of a chart for many standard TV sizes. Either way, you should see the measurements for the screen are 34.3 inches by 61 inches.

In addition to the screen size, the TV’s dimensions depend on the size of the bezel on the TV, as well as the depth. You may review how wide is a 75-inch tv and also read our Samsung UN75TU8000FXZA review for a slightly larger model that a larger bezel would not curtail. The bezel is the edge of the TV that surrounds the screen.

If you picture a standard TV, you would recognize the bezel as being the black part of the TV that is around the viewing area. If you are not hanging the TV on the wall, the stand may also add height. The amount of height added depends on the TV model.

The depth of the TV refers to the distance from the front of the TV to the furthest back part, though the stand may add some depth to the TV as well. Generally speaking, for a more immersive experience, aim for a TV that’s at least 40 inches wide from 10-12 feet away from where you’ll be sitting. This distance can vary depending on how big your room is and how big the TV is. For a more comfortable viewing experience, use the rule of thumb to determine the ideal viewing distance, especially if you’re measuring for a 70″ TV. 

70 Inch TV Viewing Distance

The size of the room where the TV would be placed also impacts the ideal size of the TV. The guidelines for viewing distance state that you should sit 9.8 feet away from the screen for a 70” TV. These guidelines consider angles and how much of the field of view the screen should take up. However, the people who recommend the distance acknowledge that this distance may not be suitable for everyone. If you have a smaller room then you can see how wide a 65-inch TV is. Personal preference also comes into play when choosing a viewing distance. Keep in mind the lighting quality of the room alongside distance. If you’re planning to set up your TV in a bright area, consider investing in the best TV for glare.

Resolution on the 70-Inch TV

Consumers can find 70-inch TVs with varying resolutions, spanning full-high definition (FHD,) 4K ultra-high definition (UHD,) and 8K UHD. FHD was pretty standard for TVs following the switch from analog to digital broadcasting. The full-high definition resolution increases the image quality since analog TV.

In fact, 4K and 8K UHD provide picture quality that is four to eight times the resolution of FHD. 4K UHD TVs are available in flat-screen designs, which are popular for their slim profile and sleek look. With 70 inches being one of the largest screens on the market, consumers can enjoy a truly immersive viewing experience with picture quality that rivals the cinema.

In recent years, the market for TVs has begun to shift away from FHD toward 4K TVs. The transition to 8K recently started happening and is still ongoing. Both 4K and 8K TVs have higher resolution than FHD. The “4K” and “8K” represent the number of pixels across the horizontal axis of the TV.

FHD 70-Inch TVs

Many consider full-high definition TVs to have a typically higher resolution than their HD counterparts. FHD TVs feature a resolution of 1920×1080 pixels. The resolution depends heavily on the pixels per inch (PPI.) Much like those calculating the height and width, those calculating the PPI have a bit of math to do.

However, you can find the estimate for the PPI online. For a 70-inch TV with full-high definition, the PPI is about 21.470. FHD TVs may not offer as much image quality as the others, but these TVs come with a lower price tag than most 4K and 8K TVs.

And if you are searching for a larger TV like this, check out the Vizio D70U-D3 for a 70-inch smart TV.

It may be smarter to look for a smaller screen size if you want to stick with just FHD as it won’t look as bad since the screen is smaller, however. A large average size television screen can provide an incredibly vivid picture and contrast that looks stunning when watching movies, but the resolution isn’t as strong. As you increase the size of your TV, the pixels become more stretched, leading to poor image quality on a Full HD display.

Additionally, you can check out more differences by reading our comparison on 55 vs 70-inch TVs.

70 Inch 4K UHD TVs

Many 4K UHD TVs feature a high pixel count, as indicated by the number of pixels. For example, a 70-inch 4K TV holds about 62.940 PPI. The PPI is not the same for all 4K TVs because the size of the TV affects how spread out the pixels are. UHD represents TVs with a resolution of 3840×2160 pixels or higher. While your eyes may not be able to tell the difference at a certain point, your next TV will more than likely be a 4K TV anyway. 8K theoretically offers increased image quality than 4K TV, but 4K TVs are more readily available. If this interests you, read our LG UN7370 review and see if it will fit your needs. However, if you want a larger screen, we also have our LG OLED77C9PU review you can check out.

STAT: While your eyes may not be able to tell the difference at a certain point, your next TV will more than likely be a 4k TV anyway. (source)

70 Inch 8K UHD TVs

Manufacturers who have created 8K TVs still categorize 8K TVs as UHD, though the standard fits the 4K TVs. These 8K TVs feature about 8,000 pixels across the horizontal axis. The increased number of pixels should allow for an increase in details on the screen. The most important feature of an 8K TV comes from how well it upscales images because most content is not formatted for 8K TVs. A 70” 8K TV contains about 125. 880 PPI.

F.A.Q.

What role does seat distance play in the television experience?

Seat distance plays a role in the TV experience because the eyes can only resolve the images on the TV at a certain distance. Additionally, the closer you sit to the TV, the more the TV fills up your field of view. Therefore, the TV should only take up a portion of your field of view.


What is the height and width of a 70-inch TV?

The width of a 70-inch TV screen is about 61 inches with a height of 34.3 inches, though this does not include the bezel of the TV.


How do I change the picture resolution?

Many TVs feature the ability to change the picture resolution using the “Picture” or “Display” setting option.


REFERENCES:

  1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o5mxPwu3cSE
  2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gnhv3WFnmH8
  3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/4K_resolutionr
  4. https://en. wikipedia.org/wiki/Pixel_density

Samsung 70 inch TV Dimensions in cm & inches [Width, Height, Depth]

  • June 30, 2022

Popular Category: TVS

Table of Contents

If you’re about to upgrade your home entertainment system with a brand new Samsung 70-inch TV but want to know its exact dimensions, we’ve got you covered.   Here, you can learn the Samsung 70-inch TV dimensions in cm and inches.

We’ll also discuss the ideal viewing distance and room size for 70-inch TVs. We did extensive web research and measured the dimensions of all popular Samsung TVs.  So stay tuned to know these things!

Samsung 70-inch TV Dimensions in Inches

On average, the Samsung 70-inch TVs are 62-inch wide, 37.75-inch in height and around 2-inches in depth without a stand. Withstand the depth will be around 13.5-inches. Let’s see Samsung’s 70-inch TV dimensions by popular model. 

Samsung 70 inch TV Dimensions in Centimeter (cm)

The average screen width of a 70-inch television is 156. 972 cm. Also, the height would be about 90.98cm. and depth around 5 cm The dimensions of different models of Samsung 70 inch tv in cm are listed below:

Samsung 70 inch TV Dimensions in milimeter (mm)

F Samsung 70-inch televisions, the average length in milli-metres is around 1569.72 mm. The height average height is around about 909.8 mm. While the average depth is around 50.8mm.T

For the exact dimensions of each model, check the table below. 

Viewing Distance for Samsung 70-inch TV Dimensions

Viewing your TV from a proper distance is a must for your eyes. The ideal viewing distance for 70-inch 4K TVs is 6 to 9 feet. It also warrants that your room should be large enough to provide this distance. But the ideal distance is also related to the screen resolution. So, if your screen resolution is 1080p only, which we don’t recommend for a 70-inch TV, then the ideal distance range is 9 feet to 14.5 feet. 

 

Top 3 Best Samsung 70-inch TVs

You might be interested to know what are the best Samsung 70-inch TVs, so we have got something for you.  

1. Samsung Q60B (Best 70-inch TV in 2022)

  • Screen Size: 70-Inch
  • Display Type: QLED
  • Resolution: 4k
  • Refresh Rate: 120Hz
  • HDR: HDR10+
  • Smart Apps: Spotify, Netflix, Hulu, Skype, YouTube, Amazon Instant Video
  • Voice Assistant: Alexa, Google
  • Connectivity: 3 HDMI, Wi-Fi, USB

Check Price on Amazon

It is the best Samsung 70-inch TV in 2022 due to several reasons. It is a QLED display which can get incredibly bright and also have high contrast. The picture quality is superb.

The design is sleek and modern with thin bezels. The build quality also feels premium. It supports HDR10+ and Dolby Vision. And the HDR performance is also good. 

TV has great gaming features such as low lag, quick response and 120 Hz refresh rate.

2. Samsung Q60A (Top Rated 70-inch TV in 2022)

  • Screen Size: 70-Inch
  • Display Type: QLED
  • Resolution: 4k
  • Refresh Rate: 120Hz
  • HDR: HDR10+
  • Smart Apps: Spotify, Netflix, Hulu, Skype, YouTube, Amazon Instant Video
  • Voice Assistant: Alexa, Google
  • Connectivity: 3 HDMI, Wi-Fi, USB

Check Price on Amazon

This is a good budget option for Samsung’s 70-inch TV. It is a partially smart TV because it only supports YouTube out of the box. The 4k picture quality is very sharp and the colors are superb.

It also has a unique Samsung Business TV app that lets you upload photos from your phone to your TV and s them with others. It is also good for casual gaming and you don’t feel any ghosting.  

3- Samsung BE70T-H Pro (Budget 70-inch TV )

  • Screen Size: 70-Inch
  • Display Type: LED
  • Resolution: 4k
  • Refresh Rate: 60Hz
  • HDR: Yes
  • Smart Apps: Spotify, Netflix, Hulu, Skype, YouTube, Amazon Instant Video
  • Voice Assistant: Alexa, Google
  • Connectivity: 3 HDMI, Wi-Fi, USB

Check Price on Amazon

Another best Samsung 70-inch TV that offers tons of smart features and advanced technology. You are getting a 4k QLED display, Tizen interface and multiple streaming apps.

It is a fully HDR TV which delivers realistic images. It also supports 4K upscaling of 720p content. 

Also a good option for gamers due to its responsive and lag-free gaming capabilities.

  • How big is a Samsung 70 inch tv?

    The Samsung 70″ TV has a diagonal measurement of 77. 50″, which would be about the height of a ten-story building if it were printed on paper measuring 77.5″ x 77.5″.

  • How much space does a Samsung 70 inch tv take up?

    The Samsung 70″ TV takes up 2,444 cubic feet (95 m3) of space, or about 12% of the size of an average bedroom. This is equal to the amount of space in nearly 20 small cars or 8 midsize SUVs!

  • What kind of input ports does a Samsung 70 inch TV have?

    The input ports found on a Samsung 70 inch TV are HDMI 2.0 ports for streaming audio and video to connected devices, USB Type-C port for connecting an external device such as an external hard drive or memory card reader.

Conclusion

Hope now you know the exact dimensions of all popular Samsung 70-inch TVs. Samsung manufactures some of the best 70-inch TVs that look very sleek and modern. They are great for watching sports, movies, or any other content. 

Jason Reynolds

I have been working in the electrical and Audio/Visual field for over 19 years. My focus for EagleTVMounting is to provide concise expertise in everything I write. The greatest joy in life is to provide people with insight information that can potentially change their viewpoints. Our #1 goal is just that!

Related articles


Sony XBR65 X900F Review 2023

The Sony XBR65 X900F is a high-end 4K smart TV with impressive picture quality and a sleek design.With its impressive 65-inch display …


Sony A80J Review 2023

If you’re in the market for a high-quality Tv with exceptional picture quality and advanced features, you’re in the right place. The …


Samsung QLED Q60B Series Review 2023

The Samsung QLED Q60B series is a line of televisions that offers a stunning viewing experience with vibrant colours, sharp contrast, and …

Diagonal table for widescreen TVs

In previous publications, I wrote about what key points it is desirable to pay attention to when choosing a TV. Detailed here and here. This table of TV diagonals will serve as a kind of addition to the articles mentioned and will help you decide on the size of a widescreen (16:9) screen.

Basically, modern TV panels are produced in this format, and their diagonal is measured in inches. For convenience, the table has been translated from inches to centimeters in diagonal, height and width.

I wish you to make the right choice!

Diagonal Height Width
Inch see Inch see Inch see
1 2.54 0.49 1.25 0.87 2.21
2 5.08 0.98 2.49 1.74 4.43
3 7.62 1. 47 3.74 2.61 6.64
4 10.16 1.96 4.98 3.49 8.86
5 12.7 2.45 6.23 4.36 11.07
6 15.24 2.94 7.47 5.23 13.28
7 17.78 3.43 8.72 6.1 15.5
8 20.32 3.92 9.96 6.97 17.71
9 22.86 4.41 11.21 7.84 19.92
10 25.4 4.9 12.45 8.72 22.14
11 27.94 5.39 13.7 9.59 24.35
12 30.48 5. 88 14.94 10.46 26.57
13 33.02 6.37 16.19 11.33 28.78
14 35.56 6.86 17.43 12.2 30.99
15 38.1 7.35 18.68 13.07 33.21
16 40.64 7.84 19.92 13.95 35.42
17 43.18 8.33 21.17 14.82 37.63
18 45.72 8.82 22.41 15.69 39.85
19 48.26 9.31 23.66 16.56 42.06
20 50.8 9.81 24.91 17.43 44.28
21 53. 34 10.3 26.15 18.3 46.49
22 55.88 10.79 27.4 19.17 48.7
23 58.42 11.28 28.64 20.05 50.92
24 60.96 11.77 29.89 20.92 53.13
25 63.5 12.26 31.13 21.79 55.35
26 66.04 12.75 32.38 22.66 57.56
27 68.58 13.24 33.62 23.53 59.77
28 71.12 13.73 34.87 24.4 61.99
29 73.66 14.22 36.11 25.28 64.2
30 76. 2 14.71 37.36 26.15 66.41
31 78.74 15.2 38.6 27.02 68.63
32 81.28 15.69 39.85 27.89 70.84
33 83.82 16.18 41.09 28.76 73.06
34 86.36 16.67 42.34 29.63 75.27
35 88.9 17.16 43.58 30.51 77.48
36 91.44 17.65 44.83 31.38 79.7
37 93.98 18.14 46.07 32.25 81.91
38 96.52 18.63 47.32 33.12 84.12
39 99. 06 19.12 48.57 33.99 86.34
40 101.6 19.61 49.81 34.86 88.55
41 104.14 20.1 51.06 35.73 90.77
42 106.68 20.59 52.3 36.61 92.98
43 109.22 21.08 53.55 37.48 95.19
44 111.76 21.57 54.79 38.35 97.41
45 114.3 22.06 56.04 39.22 99.62
46 116.84 22.55 57.28 40.09 101.83
47 119.38 23.04 58.53 40.96 104. 05
48 121.92 23.53 59.77 41.84 106.26
49 124.46 24.02 61.02 42.71 108.48
50 127 24.51 62.26 43.58 110.69
Diagonal Height Width
Inch see Inch see Inch see
51 129.54 25 63.51 44.45 112.9
52 132.08 25.49 64.75 45.32 115.12
53 134.62 25.98 66 46.19 117.33
54 137.16 26.47 67.24 47. 07 119.55
55 139.7 26.96 68.49 47.94 121.76
56 142.24 27.45 69.73 48.81 123.97
57 144.78 27.94 70.98 49.68 126.19
58 147.32 28.44 72.23 50.55 128.4
59 149.86 28.93 73.47 51.42 130.61
60 152.4 29.42 74.72 52.29 132.83
61 154.94 29.91 75.96 53.17 135.04
62 157.48 30.4 77.21 54.04 137.26
63 160. 02 30.89 78.45 54.91 139.47
64 162.56 31.38 79.7 55.78 141.68
65 165.1 31.87 80.94 56.65 143.9
66 167.64 32.36 82.19 57.52 146.11
67 170.18 32.85 83.43 58.4 148.32
68 172.72 33.34 84.68 59.27 150.54
69 175.26 33.83 85.92 60.14 152.75
70 177.8 34.32 87.17 61.01 154.97
71 180.34 34.81 88.41 61.88 157. 18
72 182.88 35.3 89.66 62.75 159.39
73 185.42 35.79 90.9 63.63 161.61
74 187.96 36.28 92.15 64.5 163.82
75 190.5 36.77 93.39 65.37 166.04
76 193.04 37.26 94.64 66.24 168.25
77 195.58 37.75 95.89 67.11 170.46
78 198.12 38.24 97.13 67.98 172.68
79 200.66 38.73 98.38 68.85 174.89
80 203.2 39. 22 99.62 69.73 177.1
81 205.74 39.71 100.87 70.6 179.32
82 208.28 40.2 102.11 71.47 181.53
83 210.82 40.69 103.36 72.34 183.75
84 213.36 41.18 104.6 73.21 185.96
85 215.9 41.67 105.85 74.08 188.17
86 218.44 42.16 107.09 74.96 190.39
87 220.98 42.65 108.34 75.83 192.6
88 223.52 43.14 109.58 76.7 194.81
89 226. 06 43.63 110.83 77.57 197.03
90 228.6 44.12 112.07 78.44 199.24
91 231.14 44.61 113.32 79.31 201.46
92 233.68 45.1 114.56 80.18 203.67
93 236.22 45.59 115.81 81.06 205.88
94 238.76 46.08 117.05 81.93 208.1
95 241.3 46.57 118.3 82.8 210.31
96 243.84 47.07 119.55 83.67 212.52
97 246.38 47.56 120.79 84.54 214. 74
98 248.92 48.05 122.04 85.41 216.95
99 251.46 48.54 123.28 86.29 219.17
100 254 49.03 124.53 87.16 221.38
Diagonal Height Width
Inch see Inch see Inch see
101 256.54 49.52 125.77 88.03 223.59
102 259.08 50.01 127.02 88.9 225.81
103 261.62 50.5 128.26 89.77 228.02
104 264.16 50.99 129. 51 90.64 230.24
105 266.7 51.48 130.75 91.52 232.45
106 269.24 51.97 132 92.39 234.66
107 271.78 52.46 133.24 93.26 236.88
108 274.32 52.95 134.49 94.13 239.09
109 276.86 53.44 135.73 95 241.3
110 279.4 53.93 136.98 95.87 243.52
111 281.94 54.42 138.22 96.74 245.73
112 284.48 54.91 139.47 97.62 247.95
113 287. 02 55.4 140.71 98.49 250.16
114 289.56 55.89 141.96 99.36 252.37
115 292.1 56.38 143.21 100.23 254.59
116 294.64 56.87 144.45 101.1 256.8
117 297.18 57.36 145.7 101.97 259.01
118 299.72 57.85 146.94 102.85 261.23
119 302.26 58.34 148.19 103.72 263.44
120 304.8 58.83 149.43 104.59 265.66
121 307.34 59.32 150.68 105. 46 267.87
122 309.88 59.81 151.92 106.33 270.08
123 312.42 60.3 153.17 107.2 272.3
124 314.96 60.79 154.41 108.08 274.51
125 317.5 61.28 155.66 108.95 276.73
126 320.04 61.77 156.9 109.82 278.94
127 322.58 62.26 158.15 110.69 281.15
128 325.12 62.75 159.39 111.56 283.37
129 327.66 63.24 160.64 112.43 285.58
130 330. 2 63.73 161.88 113.3 287.79
131 332.74 64.22 163.13 114.18 290.01
132 335.28 64.71 164.37 115.05 292.22
133 337.82 65.2 165.62 115.92 294.44
134 340.36 65.7 166.87 116.79 296.65
135 342.9 66.19 168.11 117.66 298.86
136 345.44 66.68 169.36 118.53 301.08
137 347.98 67.17 170.6 119.41 303.29
138 350.52 67.66 171.85 120. 28 305.5
139 353.06 68.15 173.09 121.15 307.72
140 355.6 68.64 174.34 122.02 309.93
141 358.14 69.13 175.58 122.89 312.15
142 360.68 69.62 176.83 123.76 314.36
143 363.22 70.11 178.07 124.64 316.57
144 365.76 70.6 179.32 125.51 318.79
145 368.3 71.09 180.56 126.38 321
146 370.84 71.58 181.81 127.25 323.22
147 373. 38 72.07 183.05 128.12 325.43
148 375.92 72.56 184.3 128.99 327.64
149 378.46 73.05 185.54 129.86 329.86
150 381 73.54 186.79 130.74 332.07
Diagonal Height Width
Inch see Inch see Inch see

how to convert to centimeters, measure correctly and find out the dimensions

When buying a TV, pay attention to the price, brand, specifications, but above all – the size of the screen. The diagonal of the TV is measured in cm and inches. To understand what size TV panel is better to purchase, you should familiarize yourself with the methods for calculating the optimal diagonal and, in accordance with this, with the rules for choosing the dimensions of television equipment.

Reasons for measuring diagonals in inches

An inch is a unit of measurement in the English metric system, and its use when designating the screen size of modern plasma or LCD TVs is explained by the fact that most of the television equipment is produced by foreign brands (Philips, Samsung, Sony, Panasonic, LG, etc.) . In the USSR, most TV receivers were made by domestic manufacturers, and the diagonal was determined in centimeters.

To understand how much the screen size will be in centimeters, despite the fact that the corresponding parameter is indicated on the price tag in inches, you can convert these numbers using a calculator. To do this, you need to find out how many cm is 1 inch.

Important! According to the metric system, 1 inch corresponds to 2.54 cm. Thus, you can calculate the diagonal in centimeters by multiplying the number of inches by 2.54. For example, a 24-inch screen is 61 cm. .

See 48 55 60 71 81 102 107 109 125 127 152 165 203
inches 19 22 24 28 32 40 42 43 49 50 60 65 80

Diagonal relationship with TV dimensions

TV diagonal is directly dependent on its dimensions : the higher this indicator, the greater the width and height of the TV panel. The standard values ​​for height and width depending on the diagonal are shown in the table below (but please note that the indicated dimensions refer directly to the screen).

As for the dimensions of the TV, they can be calculated by adding similar screen parameters with a frame around it (that is, width with width, height with height). And then some users, having decided to measure the diagonal with a tape measure, are surprised to receive numbers that do not correspond to those stated in the TV data sheet.

Important! To correctly determine the diagonal of television equipment, only the size of the matrix is measured. The TV with the frame does not need to be measured.

The fact that the distance between opposite corners is used as a standard for measuring TV size has some explanation. Firstly, when selling television equipment, it is easier to use and remember one number than two (width and height), and secondly, even having the same diagonal, different devices may differ in dimensions, because the TV frame, depending on the model and manufacturer, may have a different thickness.

Rules for choosing TV sizes

When choosing a TV, the buyer needs to take into account many parameters, from the diagonal with screen resolution to the dimensions of the room. But first of all, measures the height and width of the place where the TV panel will be located, and the distance to the audience . It is these parameters that are relative, and the remaining factors depend on the characteristics of the TV itself.

Depending on screen format

Screen standard – is the ratio of the width and height of the TV panel. At the dawn of cinema, there was a single standard – 4: 3, i.e. the image was almost square. With the advent of digital television to replace analog, a new widescreen standard appeared – 16: 9, i.e. the screen became elongated in width. This allows the viewer to enjoy the movie more by increasing the area of ​​the image.

Depending on the format, the optimal TV viewing distance is selected.

Important! For equipment with 4:3 parameters, the distance to the audience should be from 3 to 5 TV diagonals, and for 16:9 format – from 2. 5 to 3.

Thus, the optimal viewing distance for a 42-inch widescreen TV is 2.5-3 meters. A 55-inch screen will be clearly visible from about 4 meters, and for 32 inches or 81 cm – 2-2.5 m.

Based on resolution

The next thing to consider when choosing a TV is the screen resolution. The lower the resolution of the signal fed to the panel, the smaller the diagonal of the TV should be selected. Otherwise, the user will see a blurry image with a large number of defects and shortcomings.

Thus, the above recommendations on the distance to television equipment, depending on the screen format, are based on calculations for a minimum signal resolution of 720×576 pixels. If the image is broadcast with a resolution of 1280×720 ppi, then the distance to the viewer is 2.3 diagonal values, with 1920×1080 ppi – 1.56, and with Ultra HD picture quality – 0.7. Thus, for a TV with a diagonal size of 100 cm and a resolution of 1920×1080 ppi, viewers are recommended to be at a distance of 1 meter 56 centimeters from it. And at 120 cm and Ultra HD quality, you can watch programs from just 86 centimeters.

Depending on the size of the room

Another important parameter to pay attention to is the dimensions of the room. For small rooms, you need to choose a TV panel with a small diagonal and vice versa.

If you calculate the area of ​​the room incorrectly and purchase equipment that is larger than recommended, the person will experience discomfort, not pleasure, when viewing. Firstly, the viewer, located close to the screen, will see all the image defects, which is especially important with a weak signal. Secondly, the short distance of will cause significant strain on the eyes of , and regular viewing from such a distance will cause impaired vision.

You also need to take into account that large equipment will look out of place in a small room, and the owner, sitting close, will not be able to fully capture the screen with his eyes. It should be understood that it is very difficult to determine the appropriate dimensions of equipment in the store correctly . Typically, trading floors are large, and the TVs in them seem small. Whereas at home, such a device will be huge.

Tip! In order not to get into trouble, it is better to check the dimensions of the TV model you like. To do this, you need to measure the length and width of the equipment and compare these dimensions with the capabilities of the place that is defined for the panel.

Depending on the distance to TV

In order to choose the correct diagonal of the TV panel without bothering with calculations, which will allow you to watch movies and programs without defects in picture quality, completely cover the screen with your eyes and protect your eyes from unnecessary strain, the distance will be given in table depending on the size of the diagonals and the resolution of the TV signal.

Inches/centimeters

Pixels

32/81 37/93 40/101 42/106 50/127 52/132
625 250 cm 310 cm 330 cm 340 cm 400 cm 420 cm
720 190 cm 220 cm 240 cm 250 cm 300 cm 310 cm
1080 130 cm 150 cm 160 cm 170 cm 200 cm 220 cm
2160 80 cm 90 cm 100 cm 120 cm 150 cm 170 cm

Other factors

In order to calculate and determine the dimensions of the TV panel in advance, you should also take into account the content that you plan to watch . So, if the focus is on movies, you can get a slightly larger TV than the distance allows. Thus, sitting in front of a large screen, the user will be able to experience an effect similar to watching a movie in a cinema.

If you plan to watch educational programs, news or sports TV channels, you should not buy large equipment, otherwise the person will not be able to fully capture the image of with his eyes and will miss some of the information.

The most popular diagonals

It is believed that 19 – 22 inch TVs are best purchased for small kitchens . If dimensions allow, you can choose TV equipment from 24 to 28 inches. Large dimensions will be inappropriate in a room intended for cooking and eating.

32-40 inch panels are suitable for bedrooms. The best choice would be the equipment of such companies as Samsung, LG, Philips. Among the products of these manufacturers, you can choose from simple devices, and equipped with additional features such as Wi-Fi, Smart TV, which allow you to broadcast multimedia content from mobile devices or PCs, as well as via the Internet.

Vacuum pet hair best: The 6 Best Vacuums For Pet Hair – Spring 2023: Reviews

Опубликовано: April 19, 2023 в 4:36 pm

Автор:

Категории: Miscellaneous

The 6 Best Vacuums For Pet Hair – Spring 2023: Reviews

  1. Table of Contents
  2. Intro
  3. Best Vacuum

    1. Best Upper Mid-Range

      1. Best Mid-Range

        1. Best Budget

          1. Best Upright

            1. Best Canister

              1. Notable Mentions
              2. Recent Updates
              3. All Reviews
              4. Discussions

              Updated May 31, 2023 at 10:48 am

              By Evan Jakab

              If you’re a pet owner, there’s no doubt you’ve had to deal with the hassle of shedding. We all love our furry friends, but there’s no denying pet hair is a nuisance. It has a nasty tendency to get everywhere, so a vacuum that can clear this type of debris across a wide range of surfaces is crucial. Good maneuverability and portability are plus points, as they let you clean pet hair from underneath and around couches, tables, and other types of furniture.

              We’ve tested over 130 vacuum cleaners, and below are our recommendations for the best vacuums for pet hair. These recommendations are based not only on their pet-hair cleaning performance on different types of surfaces but also on their design and price. For more buying recommendations, look at our list of the best robot vacuums for pet hair, the best handheld vacuums for pet hair, the best apartment vacuums, and the best vacuums for high-pile carpet.

              1. Best Vacuum For Pet Hair

                Dyson V15 Detect

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Pets

                8.0

                Vacuum Type

                Stick/Handheld

                Bagless

                Yes

                Cordless

                Yes

                Anti-Allergy Filter (HEPA)

                Yes

                Wet Compatible

                No

                See all our test results

                The Dyson V15 Detect is the best vacuum for pet hair we’ve tested. This high-end cordless stick vacuum has a powerful 230AW suction motor and consequently has no problem dealing with pet hair on a wide variety of surface types, whether you’re using the multi-surface floorhead or the soft-roller floorhead with an integrated laser light to help you see fine debris. Its built-in dirt sensor also gives you a rough estimate of allergen levels inside your home, and its whole machine filtration system, which features an onboard HEPA filter, is effective at sealing in fine particles. Meanwhile, its surface detection system lets it automatically increase its suction power on carpeted floors. While this vacuum can run for more than 70 minutes in its most energy-efficient configuration, it drops to a little over 10 minutes when used in its ‘Boost’ setting, so you must work fast when dealing with stubborn debris.

                Worried about running out of charge midway through a cleaning session? Check out the Samsung Bespoke Jet, which has a charging rack that can top up its two included batteries simultaneously, so you can swap in a fully-charged pack when you run out, effectively doubling its runtime. The freestanding charging rack also works as a self-emptying base station, as it can suck debris from the Samsung vacuum’s dustbin into an internal dirtbag, minimizing maintenance requirements. That said, its twin-roller floorhead makes it less maneuverable than the Dyson.

                See our review

              2. Best Upper Mid-Range Vacuum For Pet Hair

                LG CordZero A9 Ultimate

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Pets

                7.8

                Vacuum Type

                Stick/Handheld

                Bagless

                Yes

                Cordless

                Yes

                Anti-Allergy Filter (HEPA)

                Yes

                Wet Compatible

                No

                See all our test results

                If you want to save a little bit of money on a vacuum for cleaning pet hair, the LG CordZero A9 Ultimate is a good choice. Compared to the pricier Dyson V15 Detect, it has a notably less powerful 140AW suction motor and a smaller dirt compartment. It also lacks Dyson’s particle sensor and automatic power adjustment capability. It’s also less expensive, slightly more sturdily built, and just as effective at tackling pet hair on a wide range of surfaces. The flagship Ultimate variant of this vacuum is extremely well-equipped. It comes with a wide variety of accessories, including a secondary soft-roller floorhead for use on bare floors, an extra battery that can provide up to an additional hour of runtime, and a uniquely-designed Power Punch tool, which uses a vibrating interior component to shake loose dust or pet dander from fabric surfaces so that the vacuum can suck up any loose material.

                The LG is also fully compatible with LG’s Power Mop nozzle, a uniquely-designed mopping floorhead that you can use to scrub away any dirt or mud your pet might track in on hardwood, tile, or vinyl floors. If you want a similarly-priced cordless stick vacuum with an automatic power adjustment feature, the Dyson V12 Detect Slim is an excellent choice that also does a fantastic job of handling pet hair. However, it has an extremely small dustbin and only comes bundled with a single battery. Unlike the LG, Dyson doesn’t offer a comparable mopping floorhead for the V12.

                See our review

              3. Best Mid-Range Vacuum For Pet Hair

                Samsung Jet 75 Pet

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Pets

                7.3

                Vacuum Type

                Stick/Handheld

                Bagless

                Yes

                Cordless

                Yes

                Anti-Allergy Filter (HEPA)

                Yes

                Wet Compatible

                No

                See all our test results

                The best vacuum for cat hair in the mid-range price bracket we’ve tested is the Samsung Jet 75 Pet. This cordless stick vacuum can tackle pet hair on bare floors and low and high-pile carpets at a much lower price than the LG CordZero A9 or Dyson V15 Detect, thanks in part to a potent 200AW suction motor. Its multi-surface floorhead is a little more prone to collecting pet hair than the LG or Dyson, but thankfully removing the brushroll and clearing out any tangled hair is a breeze. This variant of the Jet 75 comes with a turbo brush attachment that’s effective in clearing away pet hair but, unfortunately, is unwieldy. Like all of Samsung’s other Jet-series vacuums, it has a five-stage filtration system that does a good job of sealing in pet dander. You can expect a max runtime of about an hour with a fully-charged battery, which is pretty good by the standards of its class.

                Unfortunately, unlike the pricier Dyson V15 Detect, it doesn’t have an automatic power adjustment feature that would allow it to increase its suction power on carpets. If that’s a feature you want, the Tineco PURE ONE S11 is a good comparably-priced alternative, though it has a weaker suction motor, a shorter battery life, and a smaller dustbin.

                See our review

              4. Best Budget Vacuum For Pet Hair

                JASHEN V16

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Pets

                7.9

                Vacuum Type

                Stick/Handheld

                Bagless

                Yes

                Cordless

                Yes

                Anti-Allergy Filter (HEPA)

                Yes

                Wet Compatible

                No

                See all our test results

                If you’re shopping at the more affordable end of the market, the JASHEN V16 is one of the best vacuums for dog hair we’ve tested. It’s considerably less powerful than the Samsung Jet 75 and feels flimsy. That said, it’s cheaper and is as effective for dealing with pet hair on various surfaces. Unlike the Samsung or most other vacuums in this price range, it comes with two interchangeable brushrolls: a bristled multi-surface roller and a soft roller that won’t create micro-scratches on delicate flooring types. Since these rollers are so easy to remove, it’s easy for dust to accumulate on their rollers. Another rare-for-its-price feature is the onboard HEPA filter, which is effective in helping seal in fine allergens. The vacuum even comes with a miniature turbo brush tool that’s impressively effective in clearing away pet hair on fabric surfaces.

                At under six pounds, this vacuum is also very lightweight, even by the standards of other stick models, making it a breeze to maneuver in tight spots. Unfortunately, it struggles with bulky debris, like whole cereal pieces, which can clog the entry to its dustbin. If you’re looking for a budget-friendly vacuum that performs slightly better in this regard, the Wyze Cordless Vacuum is a good choice. Still, it comes with far fewer attachments than the JASHEN, and replacement parts are currently difficult to find.

                See our review

              5. Best Upright Vacuum For Pet Hair

                Dyson Ball Animal 3 Extra

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Pets

                8.4

                Vacuum Type

                Upright

                Bagless

                Yes

                Cordless

                No

                Anti-Allergy Filter (HEPA)

                Yes

                Wet Compatible

                Mopping Only

                See all our test results

                If you prefer the all-in-one design of an upright vacuum, the Dyson Ball Animal 3 is among the best vacuums for dog hair we’ve tested. This bagless upright is far more of a hassle to set up and use than a cordless stick model like the Dyson V15 Detect, but it’s worth a look if you prioritize debris-pickup performance above all else. It easily clears away pet hair on a range of floor types, and its floorhead offers three levels of surface adjustment and a set of built-in vanes that do a great job of preventing hair from getting tangled in the mechanism. It’s also allergen-sealed and has an onboard HEPA filter to limit the spread of fine allergens like pet dander as you clean, though shaking out its dustbin can still release a cloud of dust and debris. The Extra variant of this vacuum comes with a dedicated pet grooming tool to clear away any loose fur from long-haired pets and a miniature turbo brush attachment to clear away hair on fabric surfaces.

                Consider a bagged vacuum like the Kenmore Intuition Bagged if you have allergies and want a cleaner debris disposal process. You can drop the Kenmore’s dirtbag into the trash with the press of a single latch, making it much easier and more hygienic to empty than the Dyson. However, the Kenmore also has a far more tangle-prone floorhead that doesn’t do as well with pet hair on bare floors.

                See our review

              6. Best Canister Vacuum For Pet Hair

                Miele Complete C3 Cat & Dog PowerLine

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Searching

                Finding Store

                Pets

                8.2

                Vacuum Type

                Canister

                Bagless

                No

                Cordless

                No

                Anti-Allergy Filter (HEPA)

                Yes

                Wet Compatible

                No

                See all our test results

                If you prefer the more maneuverable design of a canister vacuum over an upright vacuum, the Miele Complete C3 Cat & Dog is a great option. It might be a lot pricier than the Dyson Ball Animal 3, but that’s reflected in its design, as this vacuum has a sturdy body made of high-grade plastic and a wand made from stainless steel. It’s also substantially easier to maintain, with quickly replaceable dirtbags and filters. The Cat & Dog PowerLine variant of the C3 also comes with an activated charcoal filter to trap odors as you clean, not to mention Miele’s SEB 228 powerhead, which can easily handle pet hair on everything from low-pile rugs to plush carpeting. It also has a separate straight-suction parquet floorhead to tackle pet hair on bare floors.

                If you’re looking for a bagged vacuum with lower recurring costs, the SEBO Airbelt D4 is a good option with larger dirtbags and longer-lasting filters. It’s also heavier and bulkier, making it less easy to maneuver in cluttered rooms. Conversely, if you’re shopping for something more affordable, the Cat & Dog variant of the Miele Classic C1 is a good option with similar features. However, it feels less sturdily built than the C3 and has no onboard tool storage compartment.

                See our review

              Notable Mentions

              • Samsung Jet 90 Complete:
                The Samsung Jet 90 Complete is a cordless stick vacuum that’s among the best vacuums for pet hair and hardwood floors we’ve tested, as it does a fantastic job of handling pet hair on a wide variety of surfaces. However, it lacks the Dyson V15 Detect’s automatic power adjustment feature and dirt sensor.
                See our review
              • Shark Stratos Cordless:
                The Shark Stratos Cordless is an upper mid-range cordless stick vacuum that’s among the best vacuums for pet hair and hardwood floors we’ve tested. However, unlike the LG CordZero A9, its primary brushroll isn’t removable, and despite its billing as being self-cleaning, it can still collect pet hair, making it a hassle to clean. It also doesn’t come bundled with a miniature turbo brush tool.
                See our review
              • BISSELL CleanView/CleanView Swivel Pet Rewind:
                The BISSELL CleanView Swivel is a budget-friendly bagless upright that does a fantastic job cleaning pet hair on several surfaces. However, it’s bulky and doesn’t have a HEPA filter, unlike the Dyson Ball Animal 3.
                See our review
              • Shark Vertex Pro Powered Lift-Away:
                The Shark Vertex Pro Powered Lift-Away is a cordless upright vacuum that represents a good alternative to the Dyson Ball Animal 3 if you want the go-anywhere range of a cordless mode. However, it has a somewhat short battery life when used as an upright and lacks any floorhead height adjustment, meaning it can get tangled on rugs.
                See our review
              • Airsign HEPA Vacuum:
                The Airsign HEPA Vacuum is a mid-range canister vacuum that represents a good alternative to the Miele Complete C3 thanks to its similar overall performance on bare floors and slightly more compact size. However, it has a shorter range, isn’t as well-built, and doesn’t come with a motorized floorhead.
                See our review
              • Eureka Mighty Mite:
                The Eureka Mighty Mite is a great option if you’re on a tight budget, thanks to its back-to-basic design and superb pet hair cleaning performance make it a solid choice. However, it feels far less well-built than pricier canister vacuums like the Miele Complete C3 and is pretty minimalistic in quality-of-life features.
                See our review

              Recent Updates

              1. May 31, 2023:
                Replaced Tineco PURE ONE S11 Tango with Samsung Jet 75 Pet as ‘Best Mid-Range Vacuum For Pet Hair’ due to current availability.

              2. May 02, 2023:
                Minor in-text adjustments to improve clarity of information for users.

              3. Apr 03, 2023:
                Verified that all main picks are still the best fit for user needs and preferences.

              4. Mar 17, 2023:
                Swapped Dyson V12 Detect Slim for LG CordZero A9 Ultimate as ‘Best Upper Mid-Range Vacuum For Pet Hair’ and Wyze Cordless Vacuum for JASHEN V16 as ‘Best Budget Vacuum For Pet Hair’ pick. Added Shark Stratos Cordless to Notable Mentions.

              5. Feb 17, 2023:
                Ensured all main picks are still available and represent the best option for user needs. Removed less relevant Notable Mentions picks.

              All Reviews

              Our recommendations are based on what we think are currently the best vacuums to buy. We factor in a fairly wide range of factors, including availability, price, and reader feedback.

              If you would like to do the work of choosing yourself, here’s the list of all our vacuum reviews, ranked by their pet-hair cleaning performance. Be careful not to get too caught up in the details. While no vacuum is perfect for every use, most are good enough to please almost everyone, and the differences are often not noticeable unless you really look for them.

              Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum review (AZ3000)

              Shark Stratos upright vacuum deals

              £299. 99

              View

              Show More Deals

              powered by

              If you share your home with a dog or cat – or multiple pets – a high-quality vacuum is an absolute must. The best vacuums for pets have powerful suction that can handle hair, dirt, and dander, and you may also want to look for things like HEPA filtration and tangle-free brushrolls, especially if your pets have long hair. 

              The Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum (AZ3000) boasts all these features, as well as odor neutralization and multiple attachments. The Stratos also stands out among the best vacuums thanks to its versatile design, which has a unique LiftAway mode that makes it easier to tackle hard-to-navigate areas, like stairs and underneath furniture. There are even LED lights on the brushroll that make it easy to spot dirt and hair on your floors and in dim corners, delivering a more thorough clean. 

              While the Shark Stratos sounds like a great choice for multi-pet households, we wanted to see if it lives up to the hype. I tested the vacuum for two weeks, using it to clean up after my two long-haired dogs, and I was thoroughly impressed by its suction power and ability to handle tough messes. 

              Shark Stratos Special Offer| $429 $299 at Shark Cleanwith code STRATOS130

              This special promotional price is available exclusively via Shark and includes a free under-appliance wand.

              Today’s Best Deals

              £299.99

              View

              Show More Deals

              About our reviewer

              About our reviewer

              Product Reviewer

              Camryn Rabideau is a freelance writer and product reviewer who has been testing home goods, including cleaning tools, for several years. She tested the Shark AZ3000 Stratos Upright Vacuum from her small homestead in Rhode Island. As the owner of two dogs and a cat, she’s always looking for the best products to help keep her home (at least somewhat) free of pet hair. 

              When Camryn is not tinkering around with the latest home gadgets, she spends her time tending to her animals, working in her garden, or crafting.

              Who will love the Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum?

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              The Shark AZ3000 Stratos Upright Vacuum is best for busy households with one or more pets, as it offers powerful suction and filtration, and it’s equally effective on both long and short pet hair. It’s designed to be used as a primary vacuum for deep cleaning carpeting and hard floors – because it’s a corded model and fairly bulky, it isn’t the most convenient option for picking up small messes or cleaning out your car.  

              Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum: Specifications

              (Image credit: Shark)

              • Model number:  AZ3000
              • Maximum power: 1416W
              • Bin capacity: 1.4 L 
              • Bin type: bagless
              • Cord length: 30ft.
              • Cleaning path width:  10.63″
              • Dimensions:  11.02″ x 12.2″ x 46.46″
              • Weight: 17. 2 lb. 
              • Filter: HEPA
              • Warranty: 5 years
              • Attachments:  Odor neutralizer cartridge, crevice tool, and upholstery tool 
              • RRP: $499.99

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              My first impressions of the Shark Stratos were that it’s fairly heavy but easy to maneuver. It weighs a substantial 17.2 pounds, which makes it quite bulky to carry around, but its swivel steering allows you to get into corners and around obstacles. Still, I think the size and weight of this vacuum will make it hard for some people to use.

              I love that this vacuum has two brushrolls on the floorhead – the PowerFins HairPro brushroll has stiff fins that dig deep into the carpeting to pull up hair and dust, while the soft brush roll does a great job picking up dust and fine particles from hard floors. Plus, if one of the brushrolls ever gets stuck, the LED lights on the front of the floorhead turn red, letting you know that you need to stop and fix the problem. I only ever had an issue with this when I was using the wrong suction setting.

              The other thing I noticed right away is that the vacuum gives off a fresh odor when you’re cleaning, thanks to the “odor-neutralizing cartridge.” I can’t say whether it actually gets rid of pet odors or just covers them up, but it does leave behind a light, fresh scent that makes the room feel cleaner.

              What is the Shark Vertex DuoClean PowerFin Upright Vacuum like to use?

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              Unboxing the Shark Stratos

               When the Shark AZ3000 Stratos arrived on my doorstep, the packaging wasn’t in the best condition. It had gotten banged up quite a bit during shipping, and the top was partially ripped off. However, the good news is that everything inside the box was still in perfect condition. All of the different components were wrapped in styrofoam padding and plastic, and while this made for a lot of waste, it did keep the pieces from being broken or scratched during transport.  

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              The vacuum was quick and easy to assemble. All the pieces clicked into place, and assembly was very intuitive, only taking me around five minutes to complete. The only time I had to consult the manual was when inserting the “odor neutralizer cartridge,” which gets installed in the top of the floorhead. It simply twists into place, and you’re able to adjust it to give off more or less scent. 

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              On Carpets
              While my house has mostly hardwood floors, there are area rugs in almost every room, and they collect lots of dirt, dust, and pet hair throughout the day. There’s a slider on the vacuum’s handle that adjusts the suction for different types of flooring, and I typically used it on the medium setting, as my rugs are low-pile. 

              I was honestly shocked at the pure suction power that the Shark Stratos delivers, and it excelled at removing pet hair and dirt from my carpets, quickly filling up the dustbin. Even just vacuuming the 9-by-6-foot area rug in my dining room, the dustbin was full of hair and dirt and needed to be emptied before I moved on to another room. It also managed to pick up ⅛ cup of uncooked rice in a single pass, leaving the floor spotless.  

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau)

              On Hard Floors 
              Upright vacuums don’t always work well on hard floors, as their powerful brushrolls can scatter debris around, but the Stratos had no problem picking up pet hair and dust from my hardwood floors. Its soft brushroll helped to capture those fine particles, and it was also able to pick up larger debris, like leaves and fuzz from dog toys, with no issues. I even spilled ⅛ cups of uncooked rice, and the vacuum picked up the pieces with no problems, pulling the rice out from between the cracks easily.

              The only issue I ran into when vacuuming the hard floors in my kitchen was that the vacuum sucked up the small kitchen mat. I had the vacuum on its highest suction setting, which is meant for hard floors, and it ended up pulling the mat up into the brushroll.  

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              On Stairs
              The main staircase in my house often has little piles of dog hair in the corners of each step from my pets running up and down all day, and I typically use a cordless vacuum to suck them up. However, I found it to be almost as easy to use the Shark for this task thanks to its LiftAway mode. When you press the LiftAway button on top of the canister, the whole thing lifts off the base, making it much more compact and lightweight. I could easily rest the canister on the stairs as I cleaned with the crevice tool, and the suction power is much stronger than my cordless vacuum, meaning it picked up more dust and hair with each pass. 

              My only complaint about this mode is that the hose itself is quite short—probably around 2.5 or 3 feet. It’s supposed to be able to stretch out, but because the suction is so strong, it ends up shrinking back on itself when you turn the vacuum on. 

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              On Furniture
              I tested the Shark Stratos AZ3000, which only comes with a non-motorized upholstery tool, but if you opt for the Stratos AZ3000 (a slightly more expensive model), you’ll also get the HairPro Self-Cleaning Pet Power Brush, a motorized tool for furniture. I used the tool to clean off one of our dog beds, as well as the sofa where my dogs like to nap, and I wasn’t really wowed with its performance. 

              The vacuum needed to be on its lowest suction setting, otherwise, the tool just sucked onto the fabric too hard. It did pick up most of the dirt and debris on the furniture, but it wasn’t able to pull out embedded hairs. 

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              Cleaning and Maintenance
              When I first looked at the Stratos vacuum, I thought it had a large dustbin—ideal for picking up lots of pet hair. However, once I started using it, I noticed that the “Max Fill” line is only about ⅓ of the way up the side of the bin, which was really disappointing. When I vacuumed my kitchen and dining room, I ended up having to stop and empty the bin two times, and even then, I usually ended up filling the bin more than I should have between empties. This is definitely one of the major downsides of this vacuum.

              There are a few other maintenance tasks you’ll need to complete to keep the Stratos running in peak condition. It has a washable foam filter that needs to be rinsed once a month. Honestly, after two weeks of fairly heavy use, this filter was already starting to look quite dirty and could likely be cleaned. You’ll also need to periodically replace the odor-neutralizing cartridge—the brand recommends installing a new one every six months.

              Storage
              The Shark Stratos isn’t the most convenient vacuum to store. It has a fairly large footprint and is quite tall, meaning it will take up quite a bit of space in a closet or other storage space. The power cord can be wound around the cord wrap on the side of the machine, but unfortunately, there’s nowhere to store the accessories on the vacuum itself.  

              How does the Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum rate online?

              On the Shark website, the Stratos AZ3000 has more than 300 reviews and an average rating of 4.5 stars. It gets top marks from pet owners, who agree that the suction is unbeatable, and many people also note that it works well on both fine particles and larger debris.  

              Among those who weren’t totally satisfied with the vacuum, some of the most common complaints were that the vacuum is quite heavy and can tip over easily when you’re using the attachment hose. 

              How does the Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum compare to other models?

              You may notice that there are two versions of the Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum—the AZ3000 and the AZ3002—and the main difference between the two is the included accessories. With the AZ300, you only get a crevice tool and a non-motorized upholstery tool. However, if you upgrade to the AZ3002, you’ll receive the motorized HairPro Pet Power Brush, a duster-crevice combination tool, a multi-angle dust brush, an anti-allergen dust brush, an accessory bag, and two extra odor cartridges. However, this model has a higher price tag. 

              Also within the Shark lineup is the Shark Vertex Upright, which has many similar features, except it does not have the new Odor Neutralizer Technology. The Vertex has a slightly smaller dust cup, but it also weighs marginally less, while also having a larger cleaning path and a longer hose. The two are pretty comparable in terms of suction power, pick up, and maneuverability.  At it’s base, the Shark Vertex comes with more accessories, but the extra Pet attachments are available with the AZ3002 version. 

              In terms of price and size, the Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum is quite similar to the Dyson Ball Animal 3, which we also tested. The two offer similar suction power and weigh around the same, but the Dyson does have a larger dustbin capacity and on-board accessory storage.  

              Should you buy the Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum?

              (Image credit: Camryn Rabideau )

              This is on the higher end as upright vacuums go, but the pure suction power of this machine makes it worth it. The vacuum performs excellently on virtually all surfaces, and its detachable canister makes it more convenient to clean stairs and other hard-to-reach areas. Plus, it handles pet hair like a pro and leaves a fresh scent behind as you clean.

              The main reason you might not want to buy this vacuum is its weight. At more than 17 pounds, the Stratos is quite bulky and can be somewhat hard to move around, which may not be practical for some households.  

              Shark Stratos Upright Vacuum: where to buy

              Today’s Best Deals

              £299.99

              View

              Show More Deals

              Shark Stratos upright vacuum: Price Comparison

              £299.99

              View

              Show More Deals

              powered by

              WHICH IS THE BEST VACUUM CLEANER FOR WOOL CLEANING – how to choose the right one

              Fluffies are cuties, we love them. But shreds of wool, lying here and there, do not cause delight. You need to buy a vacuum cleaner. And not just what. It is powerful, with auxiliary nozzles, preferably washing – such that cleanliness can be walked with it once.

              So let’s figure out how to choose the right wool vacuum cleaner. Read the article. We have nine sensible options with photo and video reviews on the review.

              Wool vacuum cleaner key features: 4 indicators

              When choosing the best wool vacuum cleaner, there are five key features to consider.

              1. Suction force
              For cleaning homes with animals, the desired vacuum cleaner power is 500 W or more.
              2. Dust container capacity
              Garbage quickly fills the compartment. A good vacuum cleaner should have this element of improved quality so that it does its job perfectly, is easily released and does not require constant replacements.
              3. Rigid turbo brush
              Leaves lint no chance. Fine wool is sucked in, and long hair is wound around the bristles. Then it is easy to collect and throw away.
              Brushes are mechanical (work due to air flow) and electric (more efficient, have their own motor). In the presence of carpet-free surfaces, for example, linoleum, parquet, it should be possible to remove the brushes, since they are ineffective and inconvenient on smooth surfaces. The nozzle can scratch the coating and, sucking, does not capture all the debris.
              4. Narrow furniture nozzle
              Wool settles on furniture. And you can’t pick it up with a hard brush. Smaller pads with bristles or a rough cloth will gently and gently pick up lint without scratching the polish.
              5.Filtration
              Filters are used to clean the exhaust air. The most common is the HEPA filter. It retains 99.9% of microscopic dust. When choosing a wool vacuum cleaner that will clean all surfaces better, you should pay attention to models with a carbon filter, which consists of activated carbon that absorbs unpleasant odors.

              Cheaper vacuum cleaners have weaker suction power, but this opportunity is compensated by better autonomy and lower energy consumption.

              Read: 4 main criteria for choosing a vacuum cleaner for the home

              Upright vacuum cleaners for cleaning wool

              They have a number of advantages.

              • Without wires

              Nothing restricts movement and does not bind to the outlet.

              • Small size and weight, optimal height

              This tandem provides comfort and no back pain, because there is no need to bend over, as with classic vacuum cleaners.

              • Universal

              Many upright models are equipped with nozzles for cleaning furniture, carpets, smooth surfaces and wet cleaning.

              • No bulky or dusty bags

              Filters and small containers do the job just as well as a bulky bag. You just have to clean them up more often.

              Informative article: Upright Vacuum Cleaner or Conventional Vacuum Cleaner – Which is Better: 4 Tips to Help Buyers

              Philips FC6168/01 Cordless Vacuum Cleaner

              Philips gives a 2-year warranty for the Philips FC6168/01 vacuum cleaner. It is intended for dry cleaning only. Great for pet owners thanks to the TriActive Turbo Electric Toothbrush. It qualitatively cleans any floor surface, including baseboards, from animal hair. Such brushes differ in power and efficiency due to their own motor.

              Five features of the unit:

              • contains a dust collector in the form of a plastic container with a volume of 0. 6 l, which is emptied of debris by pressing a button;
              • removable element makes it possible to clean not only floors, but also furniture;
              • vacuum cleaner design allows you to clean under sofas and cabinets;
              • battery is able to work autonomously up to 40 minutes. To vacuum a 3-room apartment – this is more than enough;
              • battery charge duration – 5 hours.

              Among the shortcomings, users identified:

              • difficulty in cleaning in hard-to-reach places: near baseboards and under low furniture;
              • a clogged filter affects the power of the vacuum cleaner;
              • Small amount of dust blowback occasionally encountered;
              • does not cope with large debris.

              Users also indicated that the model meets the power parameters and perfectly collects wool and hair from all surfaces.

              Samsung VS80N8014KW/EV Vacuum Cleaner

              Minimalist and concise model. The absence of wires and low weight (2.95 kg) makes the device easy to use. Compact size 0.35L plastic container releases contents at the touch of a button.

              450 W suction power allows you to quickly and efficiently clean any surface of the room. Autonomy up to 40 minutes provides a high-quality lithium-ion battery.

              In addition to nozzles for cleaning carpets, there are also nozzles for parquet, laminate, hard-to-reach, crevices and furniture.

              Three-layer HEPA filter at the outlet protects the environment from 99.9% of dust.

              When choosing a Samsung VS80N8014KW/EV vacuum cleaner, the customer gets efficiency, comfort and compactness.

              Among the shortcomings, users indicated:

              • high cost;
              • weaker power than the previous “wired” vacuum cleaner;
              • slow battery charging;
              • in high power mode, the battery runs out faster.

              But they are compensated by compactness, convenience, lightness, quiet and high-quality work even on carpets with long pile.

              Electrolux EER73IGM cordless vacuum cleaner

              Its versatility lies in the presence of a portable nozzle that allows you to clean not only furniture, but also shelves, window sills and other objects.

              The front light is a special feature of the vacuum cleaner, thanks to which dust residues can be seen better.

              The 180° rotation of the nozzle makes it easy to clean under sofas and cupboards.

              Designed in such a way that you can safely leave it upright without any support. The device is guaranteed not to fall.

              The easy-to-clean and easy-to-clean plastic container is the signature feature of the Electrolux EER73IGM bagless vacuum cleaner.

              Powerful lithium battery allows 30 minutes of autonomous work. And the bright display will notify you when you need to charge.

              Cyclone filtration makes the vacuum cleaner work as efficiently as possible. Passing through the two filter balls, the remaining microscopic dust settles on the bottom of the cone-shaped container. This ensures that the outgoing air is cleaned for 97%. The filters themselves are easy to clean, which prolongs their service life.

              After analyzing forums with reviews, we came to the conclusion that users often mention four disadvantages of the model:

              • short battery life – 20-30 minutes, which is not always enough to clean several rooms;
              • small volume of the dust collector – 0.5 l, which forces it to be freed from debris after each use;
              • the need to frequently clean the filter and debris container;
              • low power in eco mode.

              Despite its shortcomings, the vacuum cleaner effectively removes animal hair, hair and small debris.

              Vacuum cleaners with aqua filter for wool

              A distinctive feature of these options is a water filter instead of a standard dust bag or plastic container.

              The cleaning process looks like this:

              1. dust and debris are sucked into a container filled with water;
              2. getting wet and connecting, settle on the bottom;
              3. Purified and humid air comes out.

              This vacuum cleaner has a number of advantages:

              • cleaning is more efficient,
              • more sensible air humidification,
              • water filters are cheaper to maintain than dust collectors.

              But there are some minor drawbacks:

              • filters and units must be thoroughly cleaned after each use;
              • these vacuum cleaners are noisier than dry cleaning options;
              • they are bulkier and heavier.

              Vacuum cleaners with aquafilter can collect water. This will help out if the animal knocks over a vase or other container.

              Another version of the water filter unit is the washer vacuum cleaner. Its design provides two containers: for clean and dirty water. During cleaning, a small amount of liquid is sprayed from the nozzle onto the floor and is immediately sucked up. This process refreshes carpets and other surfaces. The disadvantage is the difficulty of cleaning the inside of the device due to the complex design.

              Aquafilter vacuum cleaners are the perfect solution for cleaning cat and dog hair. It does not clog, but collects in a liquid that is easy to pour out after use.

              Not only pet owners, but also allergy sufferers, having tried the model with a water filter, no longer doubt which vacuum cleaner is better for cleaning wool. The filtration process is designed in such a way that even microscopic dust particles do not get outside with the outgoing air stream.

              Washing vacuum cleaner Thomas Aqua Allergy & Family

              This model is designed for dry and wet cleaning. Brushes are suitable for linoleum, stone, tile. High-quality nozzles do not scratch laminate and parquet, clean carpets and furniture completely. Slot diffuser included.

              Mopping gently removes dirt from floors. The device does not pour water, but sprays and immediately sucks up droplets. Therefore, the coating does not deteriorate, and even more so, no prerequisites for swelling are created. Spilling wine, tea, another “coloring” drink, or spilling food, you can quickly eliminate the cause of stains. Thomas Aqua Allergy & Family leaves no chance for pollution. This vacuum cleaner can even clean windows.

              The indisputable advantages of the vacuum cleaner are 99.99% dust removal and the ability to collect liquids.

              The model, according to users, has several disadvantages:

              • there are difficulties with cleaning the turbo brush,
              • above average cost,
              • thin wire.

              Useful article: 4 reasons why the vacuum cleaner does not suck up dust – what to do, how to solve the problem?

              Vacuum cleaner Hoover HYP1610 019

              The capacious aquafilter (3.5 l) of the Hoover HYP1610 019 allows you to carry out a full cleaning cycle without even remembering to clean it. Made of durable plastic, there are no dents or scratches from hitting furniture.

              Other advantages:

              • lightness, maneuverability, compactness;
              • nozzles allow you to clean on all surfaces, in hard-to-reach places;
              • capacious aquafilter absorbs all dust and after cleaning the air is clean, without unnecessary odors;
              • low price;
              • easy to clean filter;
              • adjustable power.

              Deficiencies were also indicated:

              • noisy operation;
              • at maximum load, water drips from the filter;
              • the vacuum cleaner is easily turned over, which is dangerous by pouring liquid from the filter onto internal parts;
              • insufficient wire length – 5 m.

              Purification passes through 6 filter layers. This ensures maximum purity of the outgoing air, which is especially important for people who are allergic to dust.

              The kit includes brushes, each of which makes cleaning easy and efficient:

              • for laminate, parquet;
              • for furniture;
              • for delicate surfaces;
              • carpet floor;
              • turbo brush;
              • slotted.

              Thomas Perfect Air Animal Pure Aquafilter Vacuum Cleaner

              Suitable for allergy sufferers, families with children and pets. High power and a special turbo brush clean surfaces, even long pile carpets, of wool and other debris. Filtration does not release dust back with the outgoing air stream.

              Features:

              • high filtration,
              • suction control,
              • the power button is on the handle,
              • light weight and dimensions,
              • easy to clean and maintain,
              • meets the declared parameters and cleaning efficiency.

              It is easy to use.

              • For dry cleaning, pour 1 liter of water into the special container. Dust gets wet, gets heavy and settles. After that, dirty water should be poured out and the container washed.
              • The Aqua-Box does not need to be filled with anything to collect wet debris and liquids. After operation, the contents are cleaned, the insides of the device are washed and dried.

              Thomas Perfect Air Animal Pure is characterized as comfortable, powerful and agile. Thanks to the nozzles, it will clean any surface:

              • brushes for floor and carpet cleaning are switched with one touch of a button;
              • narrow nozzle will help to collect dust in the most inaccessible places;
              • small furniture nozzle removes dirt, hair and fur from upholstery.

              There are 2 types of filters included:

              • HEPA 13 is 100% effective against pollen and 99.99% effective against dust;
              • carbon – absorbs unwanted odors.

              With the Thomas Perfect Air Animal Pure vacuum cleaner, cleaning will be of high quality, without undue effort, and even more enjoyable.

              Wool Container Vacuums

              Bag vacuum cleaners are not practical to use. They are bulky and heavy, less mobile. Requires constant bag replacement or frequent cleaning as productivity and efficiency directly depends on the fullness of the dust collector. It is inconvenient to clean it, a lot of dust is thrown out, which is unpleasant, especially for allergy sufferers.

              An alternative to bag vacuum cleaners – container models. They cost more, but this is offset by ease of use and further savings on bags and filters. The container itself is easily removed and cleaned of the contents. Compact dimensions, high-quality air purification and high suction power are the characteristics that make customers prefer containers with appliances more often.

              These vacuum cleaners are divided into 2 types:

              An interesting article: Vacuum cleaner for home – with a dust bag or container? Advantages and disadvantages of 2 types

              Philips cyclonic vacuum cleaner FC9734/01

              Has sufficient suction power (420 W). The PowerCyclone8 system efficiently cleans the intake air from dust. The dust collector is presented in the form of a plastic container. It is airtight and prevents the backflow of debris and dust.

              The violet color of the model is discreet and does not attract attention. Together with compact dimensions, Philips FC9734/01 looks equally interesting in a corner in the kitchen, hallway or corridor.

              4 types of brushes are included in the set:

              • main TriActive + – with three holes: one central for small debris and two side ones for cleaning near walls;
              • turbo brush – powerful rotating for effective cleaning of carpets;
              • for upholstered furniture;
              • slotted.

              A feature is the ability to adjust the power. You can safely use a parquet vacuum cleaner, because the large soft wheels do not scratch the surface.

              Among the minuses:

              • heavy weight,
              • high price,
              • clumsy wheels.

              But there are much more advantages:

              • good power;
              • modern design;
              • sufficient volume of the dust collector – 2l;
              • ease of cleaning;
              • anti-allergic filter;
              • the ability to control power – 5 modes.

              Vacuum cleaner Rowenta RO 6984 EA

              Works within a radius of 8.8 m.

              The versatility of this device is that it perfectly removes dust, dirt and hair from any surface and in hard-to-reach places.

              A good wool vacuum cleaner has monocyclone filtration that separates dust from the air it takes in. High-quality filters suck up a maximum of microparticles of debris, and keep up to 99.98% dust.

              An indisputable advantage is the saving of energy consumption due to the eco motor. In terms of power and cleaning efficiency, the unit can be compared with 2000 W models, although it consumes only 750 W.

              Among the shortcomings are:

              • impossibility of power adjustment,
              • above average cost,
              • it is necessary to manually clean the turbo brush,
              • dust sticks to the case.

              An important advantage of the model is the 2. 5 l dust container, which is cleaned in four movements.

              Philips Bagless Vacuum Cleaner FC9352/01

              Portable, lightweight and compact vacuum cleaner with 370W of power for unparalleled cleaning results. 6 m of cable will allow you to clean the area at a distance of nine meters without changing the outlet.

              PowerCyclone 5 filtration keeps the room as dust and hair free as possible. The plastic waste container has a volume of 1.5 liters. This is a little compared to other models, but it will be cleaned more often. The device will not lose power and will last longer.

              Damage-sensitive parquet nozzle and soft rubber wheels for safe movement and cleaning.

              The Philips FC9352/01 is so easy to use that even a child will be able to use it after familiarizing themselves with the functionality.

              Before choosing a wool vacuum cleaner, it is worth deciding which characteristics, in addition to efficiency, are important. Does the presence of the wire play a role and is there a need for air humidification for you. For complex cleaning, nozzles from the kit are important, which will help to clean all surfaces cleanly and with pleasure.

              Topic: Vacuum Cleaner Bad Smell: 6 Solutions to Get Rid of

              Top 5 Hair & Wool Robot Vacuums (2023)

              To avoid making the wrong decision before buying a Wool Robot dogs you need to know something.

              Good cleaning of pet hair is a must for a robot vacuum cleaner in a pet household.

              However, we also consider other important criteria that make life with a four-legged friend much easier.

              Here is an overview of the most important points:

              • Prerequisite: The model must first of all be a good robot vacuum cleaner.
              • How good is the suction power?
              • How intensively does the brush need to be maintained?
              • How big is the dust container?
              • Do you need a self-cleaning system?
              • Does the robot vacuum cleaner have a built-in self-cleaning function?
              • Does the robot vacuum cleaner have a HEPA filter?
              • How good is the cleaning along skirting boards and around corners?
              • Is it possible to set a no-go zone for the vacuum cleaner?
              • How loud is the robot vacuum?
              • Do you want your robot cleaner to automatically detect and avoid obstacles?
              • What is the value for money?

              Next, we will look at the individual points in more detail.

              Requirements: The model must first of all be a universal good robot vacuum cleaner!

              In the “ Best Pet Hair Robot Vacuums” category, we only review excellent robot vacuum cleaners that, in addition, also handle the special challenges pet owners face as well as possible.

              A good robot vacuum cleaner must meet very specific requirements. Including: strong suction power on hard floors and carpets, clear and versatile App mobile app, good navigation, long battery life, low volume and good value for money.

              If you want to know more about what a good robot vacuum can do, check out this robot vacuum review. Here you can also find our selection of the best robot vacuum cleaners.

              Because let’s be honest: What’s the point of having a robot vacuum cleaner that perfectly removes dog hair and other pets…

              …but otherwise leaves most of the dirt in the apartment?

              Probably not too many.

              To sum it up: The ideal solution is: a superior robot vacuum that is also well suited for cleaning pet hair.

              As a pet owner, you naturally have special requirements for your robot vacuum cleaner.

              We will look at them in more detail in the following sections.

              Suction power

              A pet hair robot must have good suction power…

              …at first glance, this may seem a bit trivial. But especially with pets, excellent suction power is very important.

              This applies to both hard floors and carpets.

              Because pets not only lose a huge amount of hair. Also, a lot of different dirt is brought into the apartment.

              In this case, you must trust your robot vacuum cleaner.

              Make sure the device has several cleaning modes.

              Maintenance required to clean the brush

              Long hair is not usually a problem for the robot cleaner. The dog’s hair is very light, so it can be easily picked up and sucked up by the robot vacuum cleaner.

              However, animal hair (especially long hair) may wrap around the brush.
              This applies to almost all tested robotic vacuum cleaners (exception: iRobot Roomba i7).

              Then why not just remove the brush?

              It doesn’t make sense.

              This is because the brush usually consists of bristles. The texture and rotation of the brush ensure that the dirt is firmly picked up from the floor.

              Good cleaning results on hard floors and carpets are usually achieved largely thanks to a good main brush.

              But how do you get rid of hair on your brush?

              In principle, it is not a problem if a few long hairs wrap around the brush.

              The robot cleaner can continue to clean your home normally.

              However, there will come a time when you will have to remove long hair.

              When buying a robot vacuum cleaner, make sure that the brush can be easily removed and can be disassembled on the sides. Because long hair often gets stuck here.

              Ordinary scissors can be used to remove trapped hairs.

              Many manufacturers offer a more convenient solution. There is often a special cleaning tool under the hood.

              This cleaning tool is specially designed for hair removal.

              Long animal hair and human hair can be removed easily and reliably.

              Also very practical: the cleaning tool can be stored directly under the hood of the robot vacuum cleaner, so it is always at hand and cannot get lost.

              Some manufacturers have recognized the problem and offer special solutions for this.

              • Some manufacturers include a special nozzle in the scope of delivery – without the corresponding brush. This prevents wrapping of dog hair, cat hair, etc. around the brush. On the one hand, there is no need to care for the brush, but on the other hand, without the appropriate combination brush, the cleaning performance is significantly worse.
              • iRobot also takes a different approach to its models. Instead of a combination brush made of plastic and bristles, a US manufacturer installs two plastic brushes in its models that rotate in opposite directions.

              Big plus: long hair can’t get stuck here. If a bit of the dog’s hair is caught on the sides, it can be easily pulled out without much effort.

              Mobile dust container size

              Who doesn’t know this: you just cleaned your apartment and the floor is already dirty again.

              Even our little dog – so cute – regularly makes a big mess.

              The mobile dust container of the robot vacuum fills up quickly.

              In particular, pet hair takes up a lot of space in the dust container.

              Therefore, the larger the dust container, the better.

              (optional) automatic self-cleaning system

              Especially if you have several large dogs at home, the robot cleaner will quickly reach its limit.

              A large amount of dog hair fills the mobile dust container relatively quickly.

              So you have no choice but to manually empty the container every day.

              The solution to your problem is called: automatic self-cleaning station.

              And here’s how it works: When docked with the charging station, the mobile dust container of the robot cleaner is sucked out using a special device. The dirt is then securely stored in a separate dust bag at the self-cleaning station.

              The dust bag at the charging station only needs to be replaced every few months.

              It facilitates and automates your daily cleaning.

              Especially for heavily soiled households with several dogs, a robot vacuum cleaner with an automatic self-cleaning system can be the ideal solution.

              Does the robot vacuum cleaner have a built-in wet cleaning function?

              Robot vacuum cleaners with a mop function have one big advantage: they can vacuum and mop the floor at the same time.

              Therefore, it is not surprising that the so-called combined devices (hybrid models) are very popular.

              As a pet owner, a robotic vacuum cleaner with a wipe function can also be of great interest.

              Your four-legged friend’s paw prints and water stains can be successfully removed.

              However, at this stage we would like to emphasize that although the cleaning performance of hybrid models is constantly improving, it does not currently replace manual floor cleaning.

              If your four-legged friend took a nice mud bath outside before, even the world’s best robot vacuum cleaner won’t help 🙂

              However, the wipe function reliably removes light stains, small pieces of dirt and dust and , thus making your home more clean.

              If you want to know more about the Wet Cleaning Robot Vacuum topic, then read our detailed review on the topic: Best Cleaning Robot Vacuum Cleaner: Our Favorites and Our Review.

              Tip: Pay attention to the size of the water tank. The larger the water tank, the more area can be wiped at a time.

              Does the robot vacuum cleaner have a HEPA filter?

              We strongly recommend that you make sure that your Pet Hair Robot has the HEPA filter.

              As a pet owner, you certainly know how much dirt our dear four-legged friends bring into the apartment every day.

              It is not enough if the robot cleaner sucks up coarse dirt, but leaves fine and invisible dirt (eg allergens, fine dust and pollen) in the room.

              Fortunately, however, there is a HEPA filter.

              This guarantees that even the smallest dirt particles are previously removed from the intake air.

              The HEPA filter, especially for allergy sufferers, is an absolutely essential part of robotic vacuum cleaners.

              How good is the cleaning of skirting boards and corners?

              Especially along the skirting boards and in the corners, a lot of animal hair accumulates.

              Therefore, a robot vacuum cleaner must achieve good cleaning results in these hard-to-reach places.

              Cleaning along skirting boards:
              For good cleaning results along skirting boards , it is important that the robot vacuum cleaner has the side brush .

              The robot cleaner then moves very close to the baseboard and the side brush can selectively pull out the dirt stuck there and transport it to the suction port.

              Corner cleaning:
              As a rule, robotic vacuum cleaners are round in shape.

              Therefore it is physically impossible to remove 100% dirt from corners.

              However, robot vacuums perform satisfactorily in this category as well.

              Only a small area deep in the corner cannot be brushed with the side brush.

              As the proud owner of a robotic vacuum cleaner, you have the privilege of cleaning your home almost daily. This means that there will be significantly less dog hair in the corners.

              Therefore, the problem in this case is not so big.

              Roborock S5 Max also keeps us clean every day. Thus, very little dirt accumulates in the corners. With a conventional cordless vacuum cleaner, we only need to briefly vacuum the corners once a month (more information here: Cordless vacuum cleaner in the test review). Do not need anything else.

              D-shaped robot cleaners achieve slightly better results when cleaning corners. In particular, there are several interesting models in the Neato Robotics range. However, even they do not give 100% satisfactory results.

              “D-shaped” robot vacuum cleaners have many disadvantages elsewhere, so we would not like to make recommendations for “D-shaped” models.

              Restricted/Prohibited Zones

              If you have pets in your home, there will always be places where the robot vacuum cleaner should not vacuum.

              Typical examples are a drinking/eating bowl or a cat litter box.

              So more than practical if you can quickly and easily define the appropriate restricted areas in the App mobile phone application.

              Volume

              A loud vacuum cleaner is not only a concern for people.

              Especially four-legged friends have very sensitive hearing . Loud noises can scare pets.

              Therefore, it is recommended to choose a robot vacuum cleaner that is as quiet as possible.

              Generally, robot vacuum cleaner noise level is 50-65 dB.

              In addition, most models offer suction control via the App app.

              If you select one of the low cleaning modes, the noise level for your pet will be reduced accordingly.

              Automatic obstacle detection using artificial intelligence (AI) technology

              If you have several pets at home, you probably know what the problem is: there are always objects on the floor. You don’t get to clean up.

              Even for a robotic vacuum cleaner, an untidy apartment can be more or less of a problem.

              It can quickly happen that the robot cleaner gets stuck on loose objects, such as dog toys. In order to continue cleaning, you must intervene and release the au pair.

              In other words, laser navigation is reaching its limits.

              Help is provided here by “artificial intelligence”.

              In this way, the object can be identified as a specific obstacle and the robot cleaner can drive around it.

              Deebot OZMO T8 AIVI, Roborock S6 MaxV or Deebot OZMO T8+ are examples of such modern robot vacuum cleaners.

              Dog feces are generally safely identified as an obstacle and avoided.

              While the technology is currently not 100% reliable, it is nevertheless a significant help for large households with multiple dogs.

              Value for money:

              Your new robot vacuum will accompany you and your pet for years to come and make life easier for you.

Cheapest but best laptops: The Best Budget Laptops for 2023

Опубликовано: April 18, 2023 в 4:36 pm

Автор:

Категории: Miscellaneous

The Best Laptops for Kids in 2023

Just as it is with smartphones, buying your kid a laptop is fraught with concerns, except for one important difference: Many elementary and middle schools consider them essential educational tools, and equip classrooms with machines for their students. Other schools require parents to purchase laptops, offering a selection of recommended models.

Your kid will likely need to use a laptop at school, or for school, whether you like it or not, especially in the wake of the pandemic, in which remote learning came to the fore. Regardless, kids will almost certainly want to use that computer at home, too, both for fun (messaging friends, watching videos, playing Fortnite) and homework (looking up information, typing book reports).

Kids being kids, the list of factors to consider doesn’t end there. Don’t forget about parental controls, durable plastic, and water-resistant keyboards. At least you won’t have to worry about the cost. Buying a kid-friendly laptop need not break the bank—all but one of our recommended models cost less than $700, and most are under $500—and the even better news is that just because they’re inexpensive doesn’t mean that they are necessarily slow or poorly made.

Below is a breakout of the best laptops for kids that we’ve tested for 2023, carefully picked with several specific subcategories in mind to cover every kid’s digital learning needs. Following that is a buying guide that breaks out your shopping concerns in greater detail.

Deeper Dive: Our Top Tested Picks

HP Pavilion Laptop 14 (2022)

Best Overall Windows Laptop for Kids

4.0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

A solid value that dodges any significant pitfalls, HP’s Pavilion Laptop 14 (2022) is a well-rounded budget model with peppy performance and a decent feature set for the money.

PROS

  • Intel 12th Gen CPUs deliver acceptable all-around performance
  • Affordable price with plenty of configuration options
  • Wide selection of ports

CONS

  • Subpar webcam
  • A bit of chassis flex

GET IT NOW

Learn More

HP Pavilion Laptop 14 (2022) Review

Lenovo IdeaPad 3i 15 (2022)

Best Budget Windows Laptop for Kids

4. 0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

If you’re looking for a full-size, low-priced budget laptop, you could do a lot worse than Lenovo’s 15.6-inch IdeaPad 3i.

PROS

  • Satisfying performance and battery life
  • Comfortable keyboard
  • Wide array of ports

CONS

  • Screen looks dimmer than it is
  • Unimpressive webcam and audio

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Lenovo IdeaPad 3i 15 (2022) Review

Acer Aspire Vero (2022)

Best Ultraportable Laptop for Kids

4.0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

The 2022 Acer Aspire Vero is an improvement over last year’s green-themed laptop and remains the go-to choice for eco-conscious users.

PROS

  • Eco-friendly build
  • Improved display and battery
  • Good speakers
  • Comfortable touchpad
  • Easily upgradeable and recyclable

CONS

  • Almost too expensive
  • Middle-of-the-road benchmark results
  • Fewer ports than last year’s model

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Acer Aspire Vero (2022) Review

Microsoft Surface Laptop Go 2

Best Ultraportable Laptop for Older Kids

4. 0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

The Microsoft Surface Laptop Go 2 doesn’t reinvent the original, but some minor upgrades and a new CPU put this affordable, stylish notebook back among your best budget options for 2022.

PROS

  • Competitive performance from updated CPU
  • Stylish, colorful design
  • Quality build and comfortable keyboard
  • Reasonably priced
  • Swappable SSD and chassis parts for longevity

CONS

  • Less-than-1080p display with nonstandard resolution
  • Updated (but still ho-hum) webcam

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Microsoft Surface Laptop Go 2 Review

Lenovo IdeaPad Windows Duet 5i

Best Windows Tablet for Kids

4.0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

Lenovo’s affordable IdeaPad Windows Duet 5i is a well-rounded, less costly alternative to premium 2-in-1 laptops with peppy performance and a sturdy build. It helps that the keyboard is included.

PROS

  • Sturdy build and intuitive detachable design
  • Keyboard included
  • Sharp, bright 2.5K display
  • Decent performance even with Core i3 CPU

CONS

  • Just 128GB of storage
  • Only two USB-C ports with no Thunderbolt

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Lenovo IdeaPad Windows Duet 5i Review

Lenovo IdeaPad Duet 3 Chromebook

Best Budget Chromebook Tablet for Kids

3.5 Good

Bottom Line:

Shedding the stigma of small, cheap Chromebooks, the Lenovo IdeaPad Duet 3 is a compact 2-in-1 detachable Chromebook that offers both laptop and tablet functions, though its battery life is disappointing.

PROS

  • Compact, totable design
  • Keyboard cover offers good typing feel
  • Handy kickstand
  • Great flexibility for Chrome and Android apps
  • Solid performance from Qualcomm CPU

CONS

  • No headphone jack
  • Pen sold separately
  • Short battery life

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Lenovo IdeaPad Duet 3 Chromebook Review

Asus Chromebook Flip CM3

Best Convertible 2-in-1 Chromebook for Kids

4. 0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

The Asus Chromebook Flip CM3 is an excellent 2-in-1 convertible Chrome OS laptop with speedy performance, a reliable touchscreen, and an included stylus.

PROS

  • Includes a stylus
  • Includes multiple USB-C ports
  • Lightweight
  • Excellent performance

CONS

  • Clumsy touchpad
  • Glossy display is prone to glare
  • Disappointing battery life

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Asus Chromebook Flip CM3 Review

Acer Nitro 5 (2022, 15.6-Inch, 12th Gen Core)

Best Gaming Laptop for Kids

3.5 Good

Bottom Line:

The latest Acer Nitro 5 doesn’t top any charts, but it hits the performance and feature baseline for mainstream gaming at an appealingly low price.

PROS

  • Low price
  • Steady mainstream gaming performance with 12th Gen CPU and GeForce RTX 3050 Ti
  • 144Hz display
  • Good port selection

CONS

  • Core i5 CPU and 512GB of storage are somewhat limited for gaming
  • Middling build quality
  • Falls short of 60fps in most scenarios

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Acer Nitro 5 (2022, 15. 6-Inch, 12th Gen Core) Review

Acer Chromebook 516 GE

Best Gaming Chromebook for Kids

4.0 Excellent

Bottom Line:

Acer’s rousing Chromebook 516 GE is among the first Chromebooks designed specially for cloud-based gaming. If this machine is any indication, we may be seeing the birth of a promising new class of laptop.

PROS

  • Superb performance in gaming (and everything else)
  • Powerful hardware for a Chromebook, from processing to storage
  • Rich port selection
  • RGB keyboard with anti-ghosting tech
  • Gorgeous 120Hz display

CONS

  • No touch screen
  • USB-C ports aren’t Thunderbolt 4

GET IT NOW

Learn More

Acer Chromebook 516 GE Review

Buying Guide: The Best Laptops for Kids in 2023

First and foremost as a preface to our advice: Our focus here is on younger kids. If your child is at the university level, check out our roundup of the best laptops for college students. And you’ll find even more choices in our overall roundup of the best budget laptops. Also check our top picks for the best Chromebooks for kids for more on ChromeOS concerns and education aspects, especially for the lower grades.

If your child is also of the age that they may be looking to play PC games on the same machine that they’ll use for schoolwork, that is a whole other set of considerations. We’ll address that in a section near the end of this article, but know that gaming machines cost more than our other picks here.


Which Operating System Is Best in a Kid PC?

Before you begin to evaluate features, you’ll start with the essential question that has plagued PC shoppers for decades: Which operating system should I choose?

This is not the Mac vs. Windows debate of old. New Apple laptops aren’t available for less than $500—not even close. The MacBook Air, Apple’s least-expensive notebook, starts at $999 and is still overkill for an elementary- or middle-school student. If you’re an Apple fan and want to raise your son or daughter to be one too, you’re best off giving them a hand-me-down and buying a new MacBook or MacBook Pro for yourself.

Reused Macs aside, most parents will choose between Windows and ChromeOS, the operating system from Google. In addition to running web apps within the Chrome browser, ChromeOS can also run apps from the Google Play store(Opens in a new window) designed for Android smartphones and tablets, including Microsoft Office. If you’ve decided against buying a smartphone for your kids but they talk your ear off about wanting to play mobile games, buying a Chromebook might be a good compromise.


(Credit: Joseph Maldonado)

Windows 10 and Windows 11 have also become more useful for kid-oriented laptops, thanks to S Mode, which is aimed at the education market and, among other security enhancements, prevents apps from being installed unless they’re available on the Microsoft Store. This means you’ve got the ability to block games and apps based on their content ratings (something you can also do with Google Play apps). When your son or daughter gets older and more responsible, you can easily upgrade to the full version of Windows to remove these limitations.


(Credit: Kyle Cobian)

If your child’s school has specific software that runs only on Windows, your operating system choice will be decided for you. If not, you’ll want to take a close look at ChromeOS, since a few Chromebooks include decidedly kid-friendly features (such as easy-grip coatings, or display lids that double as whiteboards). Again, check out our Chromebooks-for-kids guide and best Chromebooks for gaming for more on the specifics around this OS.

Features like these are what transforms an ordinary cheap laptop into a school-friendly machine that kids won’t outgrow or wreck in a few months. Arguably the most important, though, is how rugged the case is.


Built for Backpacks: Rugged Laptops for Kids

A few Chromebooks and inexpensive Windows laptops have spill-resistant keyboards, which means that they should survive splashing with an ounce or so of water unscathed. It’s much rarer to find entire laptops that are waterproof; the rugged ones that are (models like Panasonic’s Toughbook line or Dell’s Latitude Rugged Extremes) typically cost several thousand dollars and aren’t geared toward kids at all, but rather workers in emergency-services, outdoorsy, or shop-floor professions. Likewise, it’s relatively easy to find reinforced lids or cases made of rubber to help absorb drops from a few feet, but you just won’t find fully ruggedized machines anywhere close to this price range.


(Credit: Molly Flores)

Portability is another key concern, especially for middle- and high-schoolers who walk to school with backpacks laden with heavy textbooks. Most laptops in this category with screen sizes from 11 inches to 13 inches weigh about 2.5 pounds. Go above 3 pounds, and you’re putting a real burden on your child’s shoulders. 

Battery life is important, too, but it’s no longer the limiting factor that rendered the laptops of a decade ago useless if they spent more than a few hours away from a power outlet. Even some of the cheapest laptops now boast times of about 10 hours on PCMag’s battery rundown test, thanks (mostly) to power-sipping Intel processors.


What Specs Should My Child’s Laptop Have?

The final consideration is how your kids will use the laptop, which in turn determines the processor, storage, and memory configurations you should select. Tasks such as taking notes, writing papers, or making PowerPoint slides require little more than the bare minimum, which means that an Intel Celeron or Pentium processor will suffice; a few budget Chromebook models now also use AMD or MediaTek mobile processors. These collectively are the lowest performance tier in budget laptops. (The exception to that: AMD’s Ryzen C series chips, much peppier AMD processors that are purpose-built for Chromebooks.)

The next step up is an Intel Core i3, which you should consider if your kid’s teachers regularly have them stream online educational videos. An Intel Core i5 or i7 is best, but all but impossible to find on a laptop or Chromebook that costs about $300.

If you opt for a more powerful processor so your kids can stream videos, you might also want to consider a 2-in-1 convertible or detachable laptop, which can double as a tablet thanks to a hinge that rotates 360 degrees, or a screen that detaches completely from the keyboard base. Most hybrids and convertibles are more expensive than the price range we’ve discussed to this point, but you can find a few high-quality models for less than $500 (especially in the Chromebook crowd). These are best for middle-school-age children or older, since these machines are by nature less durable than a conventional laptop.


(Credit: Kyle Cobian)

As for memory and storage, a common minimal configuration is 4GB of RAM and 64GB of flash memory. The former (memory) amount is adequate in a budget Chromebook but skimpy in a Windows machine; 8GB is really the best baseline for anything running Windows. You’ll definitely want to consider bumping up the storage capacity to 128GB, since the operating system files on a Windows PC can take up more than 20GB, leaving your kid with a paltry 40GB or so of built-in storage.

The exception is if you choose a laptop that has a roomier but slower (and more easily breakable) spinning hard drive, or one with a built-in SD card reader. (Hard drives have disappeared from Chromebooks, and mostly from budget laptops, too, barring some older models.) In the latter case, you could stick with the base configuration and ask your kids to store their bulkier files on SD cards if needed, which you can buy in 32GB capacities for about $20 each.


Time for Fun: What About Graphics and Games?

Just because you’re selecting from among relatively slow processors and limited memory capacities doesn’t mean that gaming is out of the question when your kid is done with his or her schoolwork. Some games are, of course, even educational. For instance, Microsoft has an education version of its immensely popular open-world construction game Minecraft. Students can use it to explore real-world history like the Oregon Trail, solving math problems as they begin to understand how long and challenging the trail was, researching fur-trading companies to learn about the economic concepts of monopolies and supply and demand, and more.


(Credit: Molly Flores)

Minecraft and similar games will run on Core i3 systems with as little as 4GB of RAM—it’ll even run on some Chromebooks—but if your kid is looking forward to playing them, you’ll make the experience much more enjoyable by selecting a laptop with 8GB. If your child is planning on doing more intense gaming, you’ll need to step up the power and the price to a full-fledged gaming laptop or gaming desktop. These are laptops with a dedicated graphics chip, which will be dubbed GeForce GTX, GeForce RTX, or Radeon RX.

You won’t find current-generation gaming laptops for less than $700. However, $750 to $800 is really the on-ramp for machines with game-worthy GeForce or Radeon dedicated graphics chips, and prices rise rapidly from there as you add features and power. Most kids will be satisfied with a budget model under $1,000, however. (See our guide to budget gaming machines.)


So, Which Laptop Should I Buy for My Child?

Giving your son or daughter a laptop endows them with a portal into the immensely powerful internet, even if the laptop itself may not be the most potent you can buy. It’s up to you (and your kids’ teachers) to make sure that tool isn’t harmful. Fortunately, both Chromebooks and Windows laptops have parental control features, and a laptop’s size relative to a smartphone makes it easier to both monitor activity and set ground rules like disallowing computer use after homework is finished.

Check out our top picks for laptops designed for school-age kids below. You can also check out our roundup of our favorite tablets for kids, as well as our top phones for kids.

Acer Aspire 5 (2022, A515-57-56UV) Review

The Acer Aspire name has always been a bit of smart branding, since the series is positioned as a better-than-average pick among budget laptops—a notebook you can afford, but with the features and performance you aspire to. It hasn’t always hit the mark, but the company has managed to produce solid economy choices year after year. The latest Aspire 5 (starts at $369.99; $599.99 as tested) offers a 12th Generation Intel processor and reasonable RAM and storage. It delivers pretty good performance and battery life, though as you’d expect, some features are kept basic for the sake of affordability.


For 2022, the 15.6-inch Aspire 5 line starts at $369.99 with an 11th Gen Core i3 laptop processor and Windows 11 Home in S mode. Our $599.99 model A515-57-56UV features a Core i5-1235U chip (two Performance cores, eight Efficient cores, 12 threads) with Intel Iris Xe integrated graphics, 16GB of memory, and a 512GB solid-state drive, as well as a full HD (1,920-by-1,080-pixel) non-touch display. It’s built to offer just-good-enough levels of quality in all but a few choice areas, and that’s reflected in the design, from the materials used to the connections and components inside.


(Credit: Molly Flores)

Measuring 0.7 by 14.3 by 9.4 inches and weighing 3.9 pounds, the Acer is far from featherweight, but it’s not too bulky to throw in a laptop bag or backpack. The Asus VivoBook 15 is a little trimmer at 0.78 by 14. 1 by 9.1 inches and 3.75 pounds. The Aspire’s construction combines metal and plastic, with a uniform finish that makes it hard to tell where one ends and the other begins. The lid is covered in aluminum, but the rest of the chassis is fairly sturdy plastic. The laptop is large enough for a full-size keyboard with numeric keypad, though the latter has half-width keys.

The keyboard is backlit for visibility in dim rooms, and the tiled keys are reasonably comfortable to type on. The narrower keys of the keypad aren’t as comfortable, but any number pad is better than none if you’re doing a lot of data entry in spreadsheets. The touchpad is extra-wide, giving you a spacious surface for gesture controls as well as basic clicking and scrolling.

Similar Products

4.0

Excellent

Microsoft Surface Laptop Go 2

4.0

Excellent

Lenovo IdeaPad Flex 5i 14-Inch (2022)

4.0

Excellent

Lenovo IdeaPad Windows Duet 5i

4.0

Excellent

HP Laptop 17 (2022)

4. 0

Excellent

MSI Katana 15 (2023)

4.0

Excellent

Lenovo 5i Chromebook (16-Inch)

4.0

Excellent

Asus Chromebook Flip CM3

3.5

Good

Lenovo IdeaPad Duet 3 Chromebook

4.0

Excellent

Lenovo IdeaPad 1 14

The Aspire 5 doesn’t skimp on connectivity, with plenty of ports that’ll free you from having to bring along a hub or adapter. On the laptop’s left side are three USB 3.2 ports (one Type-C and two Type-A), along with an HDMI video output and a compact Ethernet jack.


(Credit: Molly Flores)

On the right, you’ll find a third USB-A port and a 3.5mm audio jack, plus a Kensington lock slot for physically securing the machine. Wi-Fi 6 handles your networking needs (assuming you don’t use the Ethernet port), and Bluetooth is available for wirelessly connecting headsets, keyboards, and mice.


(Credit: Molly Flores)


No Feast for the Eyes and Ears

The built-in webcam is a bit pedestrian, meaning it’s your typical generic cam with 720p resolution and no face recognition support for Windows Hello logins. Nor is there a fingerprint reader, so you’ll be typing passwords the old-fashioned way.

The 1080p IPS screen is a little underwhelming in an era when higher-resolution and even 4K displays are offered on many laptops, but they’re not common at this price point, and full HD at least beats some ultra-cheap notebooks’ 1,366 by 768. The 15.6-inch size is adequate for everyday tasks like schoolwork, web browsing, and streaming videos and movies, but in this segment you shouldn’t expect dazzling brightness or better-than-bland colors. Touch screens are scarce in this price range, too.


(Credit: Molly Flores)

The Aspire 5 is outfitted with a pair of downward-facing speakers. The clarity of the sound isn’t bad, but the speakers are surprisingly quiet. Watching YouTube videos online, I had to crank the volume to the maximum to get adequate audio.


Testing the 2022 Aspire 5: Performance in Line With Price

For this review, we compared the Aspire 5 to other budget-friendly systems, ranging from the affordable Asus VivoBook 15 to the AMD-powered Lenovo IdeaPad 3 14 and Intel-based Lenovo IdeaPad Flex 5i 14, two of the best models in this price range that we’ve seen in the last year. We also included the Dell Inspiron 15 3000 and the Gateway 15.6-inch Ultra Slim, two rock-bottom budget machines with less-capable hardware and limited specs.

Our primary productivity test is UL’s PCMark 10, which simulates routine workloads with such everyday staples as word processing, spreadsheet analysis, web browsing, and videoconferencing. We also use PCMark 10’s Full System Drive test to assess the access time and throughput of the system’s boot drive. Geekbench 5 also simulates popular apps like PDF rendering and speech recognition, with a little more emphasis on processing power.

Two other CPU tests that stress all available cores and threads are Maxon’s Cinebench, which uses that company’s Cinema 4D engine to render a complex scene, and the open-source HandBrake, which we time as it encodes a 12-minute clip of 4K video (the Blender Foundation short film Tears of Steel) to 1080p resolution. Our final productivity test is workstation vendor Puget Systems’ PugetBench for Photoshop, which uses the Creative Cloud 22 version of Adobe’s popular image editor to measure a PC’s suitability for multimedia and digital content creation.

The Aspire 5’s up-to-date Intel Core i5 CPU is well suited to everyday applications, whether in the classroom, home, or office. Our test unit handily beat the bottom-feeding Inspiron and even topped the capable IdeaPad Flex 5i 14 in most tests.

We test PCs’ graphics capabilities with two game-like animations apiece from two benchmark suites. UL’s 3DMark provides the DirectX 12 tests Night Raid (less challenging, suited for laptops with integrated graphics) and Time Spy (more demanding, suited for gaming rigs with discrete GPUs). GFXBench is a cross-platform GPU performance test that uses both low-level routines like texturing and high-level image rendering. Its 1440p Aztec Ruins and 1080p Car Chase subtests are rendered off-screen to accommodate different display resolutions.

Because the Aspire 5 relies on integrated graphics instead of an AMD or Nvidia dedicated GPU, it’s naturally limited in graphics performance. It’s fine for office productivity, streaming media, and even light photo editing, but if you’re looking to play the latest games, you’ll have to look elsewhere. That said, its graphics are quicker than those of most economy models, often leading the pack in our tests.

Finally, we test laptops’ battery life by looping a locally stored 720p video at 50% screen brightness and 100% audio volume, with Wi-Fi and keyboard backlighting turned off, until the system quits. We also use a Datacolor SpyderX Elite monitor calibration sensor and software to measure the screen’s coverage of popular color gamuts or palettes and its brightness in nits (candelas per square meter).

With an unplugged runtime of 11 and a half hours, the Acer shows pretty good stamina for the price. Its screen, however, didn’t wow us—it’s a typical economy panel with limited color reproduction and barely adequate brightness, falling just short of the 300 nits we consider a baseline, let alone the 400 nits we prefer. To be honest, however, you won’t find much better in this class.


Verdict: A Budget Compromise, But Not a Bad One

Made to tread the line between budget and midrange laptops, the Acer Aspire 5 has a tightrope to walk, balancing an affordable price and capable features. The latest version handles that balance fairly well, though there are some rough spots that are hard to ignore, like the lackluster display and missing biometric and touch-screen features. But on the whole, it delivers what the Aspire line has always promised, a better-than-bare-bones laptop for consumers on tight budgets.


(Credit: Molly Flores)

Whether you’re looking for performance that edges out other economy laptops or a port selection that lets you leave the hubs and dongles at home, the 2022 Aspire 5 hits those marks. It’s a strong option for a solid laptop that won’t cost you a fortune.

Acer Aspire 5 (2022, A515-57-56UV)

Pros

  • Solid everyday performance

  • Comfortable keyboard and touchpad

  • More than 11 hours of battery life

Cons

  • Weak speakers

  • Non-touch, not-too-bright 1080p display

  • Half-width numeric keypad feels cramped

The Bottom Line

You won’t get loads of creature comforts with Acer’s Aspire 5, but you’ll get solid performance for daily use—and the battery life to back it up.

Like What You’re Reading?

Sign up for Lab Report to get the latest reviews and top product advice delivered right to your inbox.

This newsletter may contain advertising, deals, or affiliate links. Subscribing to a newsletter indicates your consent to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy. You may unsubscribe from the newsletters at any time.

Thanks for signing up!

Your subscription has been confirmed. Keep an eye on your inbox!

Sign up for other newsletters

Best Inexpensive Laptops of 2023.

Our guide to the best budget laptops proves that you don’t need to spend a fortune on a really good laptop. Every laptop in our selection performs far better than its price point, delivering reliable, solid performance without any major bottlenecks.

It’s always worth spending as much as you can afford on a laptop to ensure it lasts for years to come. But this does not mean that you need to spend money on the most powerful laptops. For most of us, $500 or so is optimal: if you buy a laptop for less, you’ll have to cut costs and sacrifice performance.

Our winner is a great all-around Asus VivoBook 15 laptop. But it might not be the best cheap laptop for you. Therefore, we provide a selection of various laptops, including not only Windows, but also Chromebooks. If you’re not familiar with Chromebooks, these are Google-powered laptops that are often very, very cheap. The selection presented here should be suitable for most people and for most tasks. You may be interested in a selection of the best laptops of 2023.

All laptops in our guide are good all-rounders. They will comfortably handle web surfing and office applications, Zoom calls, online shopping and everyday gaming.

1. Asus VivoBook 15

Best value laptop for most people. Specifications:

Processor: Intel Core i3 1005G1 90 003

GPU: Intel UHD 620

RAM: 4 GB

Screen: 15 . 6″ Full HD

Memory: 256GB NVMe SSD

Interfaces: 2 x USB 2.0, 2 x USB 3.0, microSD slot, 1 x USB Type-C, 1 x HDMI 2.0, headphone/microphone combo

Dimensions (WxDxT): 35.8 x 23.4 x 1.7 cm

Weight : 1.68 kg

Average battery life: 6 hours

Reasons to buy:
+ Spacious screen with tiny bezel
+ Reliable internal hardware
+ Fully functional Windows 10
+ Webcam included

Reason not to buy:
– Top of the range

The best cheap laptop for most people right now is the amazing Asus VivoBook 15. the tiny bezels appear much larger than they actually are, but back up that look with strong hardware and software.

Of course, you get the full version of Windows 10, which is powered by an Intel Core i3 processor, an Intel UHD 620 GPU, 4GB of RAM, and a 256GB NVMe SSD. Oh, and for those who are taking video calls and holding meetings more often than before, the VivoBook 15 also features a built-in webcam.

Solid battery life, a decent selection of ports, and a one-year warranty complete the package. For the money, this is a great system, and one of the best laptops around $500 on the market today.

Estimated cost: $500

2. Acer Aspire 5.

The best premium budget laptop.

Specifications:

Processor: AMD Ryzen 5 4500U

GPU: Intel UHD 620

RAM: 8GB

Display: 15.6″ Full HD 90 003

Memory: 512 GB SSD NVMe

Interfaces : 1 x USB 3.2 (Type-C) Gen 1 (up to 5Gbps), 2 x USB 3.2 Gen 1 (one with power off charging), 1 x USB 2.0, 1 x HDMI with HDCP and Wi-Fi Fi 5 headphone/microphone combo

Dimensions (WxDxD): 363.4 x 250.5 x 17.9 mm

Weight : 1.9 kg

Battery life: 10 hours 003

Reasons to buy:

+ Strong quad-core processor
+ Convenient M. 2 SSD
+ Decent 1080p IPS screen
+ Excellent all-day battery life
+ Solid build

Reasons not to buy:

– Boring design and big bezels
– Mediocre trackpad and keyboard
– No USB-C Charging

There are many reasons why the Acer Aspire 5 ranks so high on our list of best value laptops, and its affordable premium price is only the first. It also delivers a really powerful and versatile spec including an AMD Ryzen 5 4500U, an Intel UHD 620 GPU, 8GB of RAM and a 512GB SSD. All of this ensures high performance for all light to medium computing tasks, and when combined with a 15.6-inch 1080p IPS LCD screen, the Aspire 5 delivers a host of entertainment and gaming experiences.

Battery life reaches a respectable 10 hours, and it also has a large selection of ports, which means you can plug it into a larger monitor or TV. You also get a built-in HD webcam which is perfect for video conferencing. All in all, the Acer Aspire 5 is a really powerful all-around laptop at a great price.

Estimated price: $800

3. Lenovo IdeaPad 3.

A great value laptop for portability and affordability.

Specifications:

Processor: Intel Celeron 1.1GHz

Graphic CPU: Intel UHD Graphics 600

RAM: 4GB

Screen: 11, 6″ Full HD

Memory: 32GB eMMC

Interfaces: 802.11AC (2 x 2) Wi-Fi and Bluetooth 4.2; 2 x USB-C (Gen 1, USB 3.2), 2 x USB 3.2 (Gen 1), headphone/microphone combo jack, MicroSD card reader, lock slot

Dimensions (WxDxD): 28.65 x 20.5 x 1.8 cm

Weight : 1.12 kg

Average battery life: 10 h 90 003

Reasons to buy:
+ Strong, durable construction
+ Comfortable typing
+ Affordable price

Reasons not to buy:
– Screen could be brighter
– Average battery life
– Low performance components

If you’re looking for an affordable laptop for light computing and don’t need a big screen, then the Lenovo IdeaPad 3 is a great choice. The compact 11.6-inch screen makes it incredibly handy to carry in your bag, and it’s one of the best lightweight laptops out there, weighing just 1.12kg.

This system is a Chromebook, which means it runs Google’s web-based operating system designed for use on the web. The Google G-Suite suite of services such as Google Calendar, Google Docs and GMAIL is the perfect partner. Despite the budget specifications, this operating system guarantees a very fast performance, and with built-in HD Audio and a crisp 11.6-inch screen, the laptop offers plenty of options for web browsing, video streaming and basic image editing. All in all, the Lenovo IdeaPad 3 is a basic system for light computing, but it’s exactly what a lot of people need. Ideal for Home, Students, Professionals, Small Business, School Education and Commercial Enterprises, Online Classrooms, Google Classroom, Remote Learning. After all, what’s the point of spending $800 on a laptop if you’re not going to use all of its power?

Estimated cost: $230

4.

Microsoft Surface Go 2.
Best $500 2-in-1 laptop for hybrid functionality.

Specifications:

CPU: 8th Generation Intel Core m3

GPU: Intel UHD Graphics 615

RAM: 4 GB

Screen: 10 .5 inch 1920 x 1280 pixels (220 ppi)

Memory: 64GB/128GB SSD

Interfaces: 1 x USB-C, 3.5 mm headphone jack, 1 x Surface Connect, MicroSDXC card reader

Dimensions (WxLxT): 245 x 175 x 8.3 mm

Weight : 553 g

Average battery life: 9 hours

Reasons to buy:
+ Beautiful touch screen
+ Long battery life
+ Runs Windows
+ Strong 2-in-1 functionality

Reasons not to buy:
– Not the most powerful laptop

Surface laptops from Microsoft are consistently excellent, and the Microsoft Surface Go 2 is one of the best 2-in-1 laptops out there time, as well as a great inexpensive laptop, in general. It takes everything that was great about the original – its sleek design, great build quality, versatility – and makes it even better.

The screen is larger and has a higher resolution than before, and the specifications have been improved to improve performance. However, a bigger screen doesn’t mean a bigger device: the bezels around the display have gotten smaller, so Microsoft has been able to make the screen bigger without increasing the size of the Surface Go. Like its predecessor, it looks and feels like a much more expensive device.

With a pretty decent five hours of active use between charges, it’s good for on the go, but remember that the price doesn’t include the Type Cover you’ll need if you’re going to be typing a lot.

5. Acer Swift 1.

The best lightweight low cost laptop.

Specifications:

Processor: Intel Pentium Silver N6000

GPU: Intel UHD Graphics 615

RAM: 4GB/8GB

Display: 14″ 19 20 x 1080 pixels

Memory: 64GB/128GB/256GB SSD

Interfaces: 2 x USB 3. 0, 1 x USB 2.0, 3.5 mm headphone jack

Dimensions (WxDxD): 323 x 212 x 15 mm

Weight 900 31 : 1.3 kg

Average battery life: 16 hours

Reasons to buy:
+ Sturdy, attractive design
+ Excellent battery life
+ Fingerprint sensor for extra security

Reasons not to buy
– Screen not very good bright.
– Disappointing performance
– No microSD card slot

If you spend so little money on a laptop, it means you prefer bulky computers, but this is not the case. The Acer Swift 1 weighs only 1.3 kg and is very thin, making it a very portable PC that you can take with you wherever you go, be it a university, a library or a coffee shop.

Considering it’s cheap, you get a lot for your money, including a decent 14-inch Full HD screen, long battery life, and even a fingerprint scanner for security.

You will lose some performance because the internal hardware is basic, but for light everyday tasks it doesn’t matter. Just don’t expect to use it for heavy gaming or advanced video editing.

Estimated cost: $400 – $470

6. Asus C433 Chromebook.

The best value laptop for Chrome OS and style.

Specifications:

GPU: Intel UHD Graphics 615

RAM: 4GB

Display: 14″ 1920 x 1080 pixels

Memory: 64GB SSD

Interfaces: 2 x USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-C (USB-C ), 1 x USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type-A, microSD, 3.5 mm headphone jack

Dimensions (WxDxD): 32 x 20.5 x 1.65 cm

Weight : 1.3 kg

Average battery life: 10 hours

Reasons to buy: 900 19+Excellent design
+Aluminum alloy
+Android APP support

Reasons refuse to purchase:
– Designed for the Internet

Simply one of the best Chromebooks we’ve ever seen (check out this display, for example), the Asus C433 will get you surfing the web and running Android apps with ease. You don’t have to worry about being disappointed if you choose this affordable laptop.

Chrome OS is the same here as it is on any other Chromebook, and it’s getting better, as are the web apps that run in the browser. Now that Android apps are also supported, you can run mobile versions of apps like Spotify and Microsoft Word. With a big, bright 14-inch screen and plenty of power to get the job done, the Asus C433 is a great choice. The display can be flipped to tent and tablet modes, which makes this laptop even more attractive.

Estimated cost: $370 – $450

7. HP Stream 14.

Slim and stylish laptop with huge cloud storage included.

Specification:

CPU: AMD A4-9125 Dual Core

GPU: AMD Radeon R3

RAM: 4GB

Screen: 14″ , resolution 1366 x 768 pixels

Memory: 64 GB eMMC | OneDrive 1TB

Interfaces: 2 x USB 3. 1 Gen 1, 1 x USB 3.1 Type-C Gen 1, 1 x HDMI, MicroSD, combo headphone jack

Dimensions (WxDxD): 32 cm x 20.32 cm x 18.5 mm

Weight : 453 gr.

Average battery life: 5 hours

Reasons to buy:
+ Slim and light design
+ 1TB OneDrive
+ MicroSD card slot
+ Webcam

Reasons not to buy:
– Large screen bezel

If you don’t want to spend a lot of money, but want a stylish, inexpensive, lightweight laptop that costs around $500, then you should definitely consider the HP Stream 14 which is sold at a bargain price. You get solid specs for your money, with a 2.3GHz AMD processor, 4GB of RAM, 64GB eMMC storage, and a 14″ screen paired with Windows 10 S. The HP Stream 14 also comes with a 1-year Office subscription 365 and a 1TB OneDrive account, so you’ll be ready for office and school. The system also features a built-in webcam, which means video calls and calls can be made, as well as a microSD card reader.

Estimated cost: $370 – $450

8. Dell Inspiron 15 3000.

A strong contender for everyday work and play.

Specifications:

Processor: AMD Ryzen 5 3500U

900 30 GPU: AMD Radeon Vega 8

RAM: 8GB

Screen: 15.6 inch Full HD LED

Memory: 256 GB SSD

Interfaces: 2 x USB 3.2, 1 x USB 2.0, 1 x HDMI, SD card reader, combo headphone jack

Dimensions (WxDxT): 363.9 x 249×19.9 mm.

Weight : 1.83 kg.

Average battery life: 8.5 hours

Reasons to buy:
+ Rugged design
+ Secure OS
+ High portability

Reasons not to buy:
– Uninteresting design

Inspiron laptops are regulars in our best laptop reviews, and the Inspiron 15 earns its place with solid specs, good battery life, and a price that just falls short of the price range to be called ” Inexpensive”.

This laptop features an AMD Ryzen 5 3500U quad-core processor (Intel processors also available) with 8GB RAM, 256GB SSD, Full HD screen (1920 x 1080 pixels) is crisp and bright, with a claimed 8.5 hour battery life. It comes with Dell Mobile Connect which allows you to connect your PC to your phone and receive text and call notifications on your laptop.

You won’t want to render a 3D CGI movie on one of these, but for Microsoft Office, Netflix, and other everyday tasks, it’s fine. Just make sure you have one of the Full HD models: previous versions had a lower resolution display, which is not impressive in our opinion.

Estimated cost: $560 – $600

9. ASUS VivoBook Flip.

A quality, affordable 2-in-1 laptop.

Specifications:

Processor: Intel Pentium Silver N5030

GPU: Intel UHD Graphics 605

RAM: 4GB

Screen: 14″ touchscreen with a resolution of 1366 x 768 pixels

Memory: 128 GB SSD

Interfaces: 1 x USB 2. 0, 1 x USB 3.2 Gen 1 Type-C, 1x micro HDMI 1.4, 3.5 mm headphone jack, 2 in 1 card reader SD/MMC

Dimensions (WxDxT): 32.70 x 22.60 x 1.54 cm

Weight : 1.5 kg.

Average battery life: 9 hours

Reasons to buy:
+ 360-degree touch display
+ Decent specifications
+ Lightweight and good build quality
+ Very good thermal performance for a passively cooled laptop

Reasons not to buy:
– Not a high-end processor
– No keyboard backlight

If you like the functionality of a 2-in-1 laptop and you willing to spend just over $500 on it, the Asus VivoBook Flip is a great choice.

Get solid core specs that include an Intel Pentium Silver N5030 processor, 4GB of RAM and a 128GB SSD, plus a full version of Windows 10 Home and one year of free Microsoft Office 365.

The reason you choose this laptop is its 14-inch swivel screen with a 360-degree metal hinge that can unfold to its full length to work with a tablet. This means that this system can work both as a laptop and as a Windows tablet.

The fact that the display is touch sensitive also means that a digital stylus can be used on it, which will be useful for illustrators. It’s important to note that the Flip doesn’t come with a stylus, which is disappointing but understandable at this price point.

Throw in a good battery, thin body and built-in webcam, and you have a strong all-around package, but with a 360-degree rotating part.

Estimated $500

10. Acer Aspire 3.

A powerful budget laptop with a touch of premium build quality.

Specifications:

Processor: AMD Ryzen 5 2500U

GPU: AMD Radeon RX Vega 8

RAM: 8 GB DDR4 (2133 MHz)

Display: 15.6″ FHD display

Memory : 1TB HDD (5400rpm/ min)

Interfaces: 2xUSB 2. 0, 1xUSB 3.0, 1xHDMI, 1xEthernet, 1xSD card reader, headphone jack 3.5 mm

Dimensions (WxDxT): 38.1 x 25.9 x 2.1 cm

Weight : 2.1 kg

Average battery life: 4.5 h

Reasons to buy:
+ Rugged design
+ Huge 1TB hard drive
+ Lots of connectivity options

Reasons not to buy:
– Poor battery life

If your budget is over 500 dollars, this does not mean that you have to use low-end components. The AMD Ryzen 5 2500U processor means the Acer Aspire 3 can handle every day task and even light gaming. The 15.6-inch Full HD display is very large for a laptop in this class and is surprisingly crisp, and the 1TB hard drive, while not as fast as an SSD, is huge and provides plenty of storage space.

The only thing that isn’t ideal is the battery life, which is only 4.5 hours, which certainly doesn’t allow you to use the laptop all day on a single charge. If you like to carry a charger around with you, or you use the system mostly on a desk by plugging it in, then this disadvantage can be ironed out.

Estimated cost: $500 – $550

11. Acer Swift 3.

Great battery, beautiful design and more – all for a little over $500.

Specifications:

Processor: Intel Core i3-8130U 2.2GHz

9 0030 GPU: Intel UHD Graphics 620

RAM: 4 GB

Screen: 14″ LCD, Full HD

Memory: 128 GB SSD

Interfaces: 3xUSB A, 1xUSB C, 1xHDMI, 1xSD card reader, headphone jack 3.5mm

Dimensions (WxDxD): 32.25 x 22.86 x 1.77 cm

Weight : 1.6 kg

Average battery life: 12 hours

900 02

Reasons to buy:
+ Good trackpad
+ Processor and SSD guaranteed high speed
+ Good connectivity

Reasons not to buy:
– Starter only
– Costs more than $500

Let the Acer Swift 3 sell for over $500, but we think it’s that good system that included it here.

The Swift 3 offers a larger display and slightly better specs for about the same price minus the 2-in-1 form factor and touch screen. The i3 processor paired with the SSD delivers good performance for a cheap machine, handling less demanding tasks with ease and good battery life.

Unlike some other cheap laptops, the touchpad on the Swift 3 is really nice to use, providing smooth scrolling and mouse movements, which is important due to the lack of a touch screen. The choice of ports is also good: HDMI, three USB-A, one USB-C and more. All in all, this is a good budget choice.

The Acer Swift 3’s understated exterior hides a great laptop that boasts plenty of power for work and study. The Swift 3 (not to be confused with Acer’s other Switch 3 laptop) is an inexpensive laptop, but its simple all-aluminum chassis is loaded with powerful components.

Performance is remarkably close to the much more expensive Microsoft Surface Laptop. Its display is slightly smaller, but otherwise they are strikingly similar – except for the price.

This laptop is also incredibly comfortable to use, with a roomy trackpad and backlit keyboard that provides comfortable typing with decent travel. If you’re going to write a lot – whether traveling or in the office – this is one of the best budget laptops of 2021.

Estimated cost: $550 – $600

12. Lenovo IdeaPad Flex 5.

Affordable laptop with a flexible screen.

Specifications:

CPU: AMD Ryzen 3 4300U

GPU: Integrated AMD Radeon

RAM: 4GB 900 03

Screen: Full HD touchscreen

Memory: 128 GB SSD

Interfaces: 2xUSB 3.1 Gen 1, 1xUSB Type-C Gen 1, 1xHDMI, 4-in-1 card reader (SD, SDHC, SDXC, MMC), 3.5 mm headphone jack

Dimensions (WxDxT): 321.5 x 217.5 x 17.9 mm

Weight : 1.6 kg

Average battery life: 12 hours
+ Flexible touch screen
+ 12 hours battery life
+ Dolby Atmos sound

Reasons not to buy:
– Windows 10 S operating system

The Lenovo IdeaPad Flex 14 inch laptop is a thin and light laptop (1. 5 kg) with a flexible, swivel full touch display HD. This means that this laptop can work in both laptop mode and tablet mode, which is good value for money.

It is also equipped with Dolby Atmos audio, which means it is suitable for those users who like to watch movies, TV shows and music from their laptop.

It’s powered by an AMD Ryzen processor and comes with a reasonable 4GB of RAM and a 128GB SSD.

However, it has a copy of Windows 10 S as its operating system, which is a stripped-down version of the full OS. This must be taken into account, because if you need a full version of Windows 10, then you will have to install it yourself.

However, for everyday and lighter work, the Flex 5 is fine, and most importantly, it costs around $500.

Estimated cost: $450 – $500

How to choose the best affordable laptop.

Buying a new laptop can be a daunting task – even more so if you’re trying to make a purchase within a certain price limit, as we are here. A lower price range often means less powerful components, but that doesn’t mean you have to settle for a cheap, junk product.

As very decent components continue to drop in price, affordable laptops boast much more powerful specs, so your money is on the line. It won’t be a portable gaming beast or multimedia powerhouse, but for surfing, document editing, and video streaming, the power under the hood will suffice.

Apple MacBooks at this price point are out of the question, but luckily Windows 10 has evolved to run great on less expensive hardware. We’ve also included a couple of our favorite Chromebooks on this list (just remember that Chrome OS requires web browsing).

Prices fluctuate regularly in this market segment and retailers often offer special offers to entice shoppers, so don’t be surprised if some of these prices rise and fall – take some time to compare prices to see who offers the best cheap laptop for you.

Keep in mind that you won’t get the most powerful or most feature-packed laptop, but we think you’ll be pleasantly surprised at what you can get at an affordable price.

From vibrant displays to amazingly reliable processors, this list of the best budget laptops for 2023 has plenty to choose from for those on a budget. Design and build also keep getting better and better.

review and rating of top 4 models up to 42 000 ₽

Alexander Gerasimov it doesn’t become.

Major brands like Asus and Lenovo have reduced or even froze supplies to Russia. By the end of 2022, they were replaced by lesser-known companies from China, so far mainly in the budget and medium segments.

We tested devices that appeared in Russian stores and chose four good inexpensive options for working office tasks: with a large screen, a relatively compact body and hardware powerful enough to make basic programs like a browser, instant messengers and spreadsheets work quickly and smoothly.

These devices are unlikely to suit creative professionals. For 4K video editing or engineering design, there is not enough power, while for design and photo processing, sharper screens with accurate color calibration are required. But in the budget segment, such models are not found – and laptops from the selection differ from competitors in an excellent price-quality ratio.

Our recommendation

Best choice Most autonomous
Maibenben M547 Tecno Megabook T1
AMD’s powerful processor turns an affordable laptop into a tool for work and play. It’s also easy to upgrade Large battery and two Type-C charging ports. Tecno laptop battery life is better than rivals in article
In DNS – from 41 999 R;
on Yandex Market — from 37,000 R
On Yandex Market — from 34,999 R;
in Citylink — from 34 990 R
Smallest Most Thoughtful Design
Infinix Inbook X2 XL23 Hiper Zen
14″ display, light weight, webcam light, easy charging – laptop suitable for telecommuting and travel Well balanced notebook. Comfortable keyboard, metal case, Type-C charging and a simple upgrade for reasonable money
On Yandex Market — from 35,897 R;
in DNS – from 34 999 Р
On Yandex Market — from 40,330 R;
on “Ozone” – from 39 129 R

The best choice

Maibenben M547

A powerful processor from AMD turns an inexpensive laptop into a tool for work and play. And it’s easy to upgrade

V DNS – from 41 999 R;
on Yandex Market – from 37,000 R

The most autonomous

Tecno Megabook T1

Large battery and two Type-C ports for charging. The autonomy of the Tecno laptop is better than that of competitors in the article

On Yandex Market – from 34,999 R;
in Citilink – from 34,990 R

The most compact

Infinix Inbook X2 XL23

14″ display, light weight, backlit webcam, convenient charging – a laptop suitable for remote work and business trips

On Yandex Market — from 35,897 R;
in DNS – from R34,999

Most Thoughtful Design

Hiper Dzen

Well balanced laptop. Comfortable keyboard, metal case, Type-C charging and a simple upgrade for reasonable money

On Yandex Market — from 40,330 R;
on “Ozone” – from 39 129 R

But we do not distort or embellish the reviews. The choice of specific things does not depend on whether we receive a commission.

Product reviews in Tinkoff Magazine are independent. We make a verdict based on reviews of things and devices that we carefully studied, or how these things performed during editorial tests.

For reviews, we either request goods from the manufacturer for a test, or we buy them ourselves, or we study reviews in other publications and user opinions. Our reviews are subjective, but honest and expert: opinions are written by authors who have more than one review behind them. The editorial team of Tinkoff Magazine double-checks the texts, proofreads them and conducts fact-checking.

All prices are at the time of publication of the material, but we update them periodically to keep the reviews up to date.

The best choice – Maibenben M547

In terms of price and quality, the Maibenben M547 outperforms brands like HP, Acer or Lenovo in its segment. This is an affordable laptop that is suitable for most office work tasks, hobbyist creativity, and lightweight online games like Fortnite. Here they saved on decoration and small amenities, but the performance is at a very good level.

The main feature of the laptop is the AMD Ryzen 7 4700U processor. This is a 2020 octa-core processor that is not obsolete yet, but has already fallen in price. It easily copes with most tasks: the computer starts and wakes up in a few seconds, the browser and any applications start quickly and work stably. You can do simple video editing and comfortably play undemanding games like Minecraft and Fortnite thanks to a good built-in graphics card. If you tinker with the graphics settings, even The Witcher 3 will work.

This laptop is approximately 50% more powerful than the base versions of most of the models in the article on dual-core Intel Core i3. And it costs the same.

Another nice feature of the Maibenben M547 is the easy upgrade. You can independently add RAM and SSD in addition to those already installed. Many other inexpensive laptops have only one disk slot, and the memory is soldered on the motherboard, so there is no way to increase the margin. For professional programs and the browser, at least 16 GB is increasingly recommended, but entry-level models are almost always 8 GB or even less, so they need an upgrade.

/laptops-for-work/

The best laptops for work and more: 7 great options

The Maibenben M547 case is made of plastic but looks like metal. Tactile sensations lack nobility, but the model has a moderate weight – 1.75 kg.

The Maibenben M547 screen has a standard 15.6” diagonal. The matrix is ​​not the brightest, but the quality is better than installed on the most budget models of HP or Lenovo – you can comfortably watch a movie or play games without being annoyed by faded colors or an image fading at an angle.

There are also disadvantages. The touchpad is small, not very responsive and shifted to the left – you will almost certainly have to buy a mouse. There is also a lack of backlighting of the keys in the dark. The speakers have a low maximum volume and almost no bass is felt. And for charging, you will have to carry a rather large adapter: Type-C here serves only for data transfer.

How much:

  • in DNS – from 41 999 R;
  • on Yandex Market — from 37 000 R.

The most autonomous — Tecno Megabook T1

Tecno Megabook T1 became the brand’s first laptop — and it immediately began to be delivered to Russia, following smartphones that had already gained popularity. This is a good option for those who value autonomy and ease of charging in a work laptop. And it also has a fingerprint scanner for quick and easy login.

The base version of the notebook is based on a weak Intel Core i3 1005G1 processor. It will be enough for mail and video conferencing, but if possible, you should pay extra for the Core i5 version. The older model launches heavy applications faster and supports more simultaneously running programs, but you won’t be able to play comfortably on this laptop in any case. 10th generation Intel processors are already outdated: they appeared back in 2019year, and in 2023, laptops based on 13th generation chips will be released. Even in the budget segment, competitors offer more modern and powerful hardware.

The advantage of this notebook is its excellent battery life. It placed a battery with a capacity of 70 Wh – more than most analogues. Tecno Megabook T1 is able to last 10-11 hours in spreadsheets, browser and text editor. You can leave home for the whole day and forget about charging. Another nice feature is two USB Type-C connectors with charging function. In the box is a 65W fast charger, the same size as many Android smartphones.

The body of the Tecno Megabook T1 is made of metal and plastic, the stripes on the back cover make the design recognizable, but not everyone will like it. The laptop weighs just 1.48 kg – most devices with similar dimensions are almost a third heavier.

The Tecno Megabook T1 display is slightly brighter than the competition in this article at 350 nits. You can’t work on the street during the day, but it’s enough for home conditions and office. The lid flips up 180 degrees, which is convenient when you hold the computer on your lap.

This model could claim to be the leader of the collection, but it is let down by low performance. The keyboard is not of the best quality, and sometimes the buttons are not pressed when typing quickly – but there is a backlight. You can install a second SSD drive in the case, but the RAM is soldered and cannot be improved. The speakers are weak, and it is advisable to wear headphones to watch TV shows.

How much:

  • on Yandex Market — from 34,999 R;
  • in Citylink – from 34 990 R.

The most compact – Infinix Inbook X2 XL23

Infinix and Tecno belong to the same corporation – Transsion Holdings. Both brands in Russia are known mainly for smartphones. But the Infinix Inbook X2 XL23 deserves a place in the collection thanks to its lightweight metal chassis with a discreet design.

Infinix Inbook X2 XL23 average battery life, not enough for a full work day. But it is easy to charge via Type-C, the included adapter is compact and does not take up much space in your bag.

The screen size of the Inbook X2 XL23 is smaller than the rest of the models in the selection – 14″. The display itself is good for a budget laptop: the color reproduction is natural, almost does not fade at an angle, and the brightness is enough to work at the window.

This is the smallest and lightest model in the article, weighing only 1.24 kg. It is convenient to take a laptop with you to a coffee shop or a trip to another city. The device looks attractive: the case is aluminum, the upper part of the cover has a polished surface. Only the keyboard and the frame around the display are made of plastic. The compact case has enough connectors for connection: there are several USB, HDMI and a slot for a memory card.

Blue-green and gray are available in Russia. In more expensive models with the Plus prefix, additional colors, including red.

Due to the small size of the Inbook X2 XL23, the keyboard also had to be reduced. The up and down arrows are half size, there is no separate digital block – but not all users need it. The keys themselves practically do not play and are well pressed. I liked the backlight with three degrees of adjustment.

/list/sticker-bombing/

What do stickers on laptops mean?

Two LEDs were installed next to the webcam. As planned by the manufacturer, they should illuminate the face in the dark so that the picture is clearer during video calls. But “spotlights” shine directly into the eyes, and some users prefer to turn them off – this is not difficult to do.

The basic version has enough performance for basic work tasks, watching videos and retouching photos. The Intel Core i3 1115G4 chip belongs to the 11th generation and is about 25% more powerful than the 10th generation version. But it consumes more power, and under load the laptop turns on a rather noisy fan. The version with an Intel Core i7 processor is almost 80% more powerful, but such an Infinix costs about 60,000 R, and it makes even more noise and heats up.

Of the minuses, I note the absence of a fingerprint scanner, but most of the models in this collection also lack it.

How much:

  • on Yandex Market – from 35 897 R;
  • in DNS – from 34 999 R.

Thoughtful design – Hiper Dzen

The Hiper brand has long been present in Russia, but is known as a manufacturer of household tools, electric scooters, power banks and other accessories. Now the company has launched its own line of laptops. For the article, I chose the Hiper Dzen model – one of the most thoughtful devices in its segment.

This is a well-balanced notebook with no overt features. It is convenient, works stably and does not irritate – this is the most important thing for office models.

The Hiper Dzen case is aluminum, so this notebook has a better tactile feel than the plastic Maibenben M547. The lid here can be tilted 180 degrees. All the necessary connectors are in place: you can connect a monitor via HDMI, a USB flash drive, an Internet cable or a memory card to a laptop. The keyboard at Hiper is not bad considering the cost of the laptop: the keys have a clear stroke and full-sized arrows. Provides a simple white backlight.

Liked the convenience of charging. You can recharge the Hiper Dzen battery either through a standard adapter that comes with the laptop, or via USB Type-C. On a business trip, it will be possible to charge a laptop and a smartphone from one powerful adapter.

Base model with 11th Gen Intel Core i3 processor. It is suitable for working with text, presentations and the browser. The laptop is not designed for gaming. If you want to sometimes run games like Dota 2 or try your hand at video editing, you can pay extra for a more productive version with Core i7.

/gadgets-for-schoolchild/

“Eyes don’t get tired”: how I chose a laptop for a student up to 50,000 R

Hiper Dzen can be easily upgraded: there are two slots for RAM inside. It is also possible to change the built-in SSD to another one. The pre-installed drive is already much faster than the regular HDD in older laptops, but you can buy more storage. The manufacturer claims that the upgrade will not affect the official warranty.

The laptop also has disadvantages. The battery won’t last a full day even in simple tasks, although there is enough space under the cover for a larger battery. The screen is of average quality: strong backlight is visible against a dark background, and the colors look more faded than other models from the selection.

How much:

  • on Yandex Market — from 40,330 R;
  • on “Ozone” – from 39 129 R.

And what is on “Aliexpress”?

If you want to buy a powerful laptop for a reasonable price, you should pay attention to stores like Aliexpress or Ozone Global, which deliver goods from abroad. Computers in large Russian retail are always more expensive due to the costs of certification, service centers and marketing.

Models from the selection are cheaper in China than in Russia, but they cannot be returned or repaired under warranty. There will be no Cyrillic on the keyboard, and Windows with a high probability cannot simply be switched from Chinese to Russian.

There are many offers on Aliexpress with “unnamed” laptops that have a productive filling. And sometimes the brand is indicated, but its name says nothing even to an experienced user. Buying such a device is scary, but you should not completely ignore such offers.

For example, Mechrevo is a Chinese manufacturer of laptops that are assembled at MSI and Clevo factories. Build quality is on par with branded devices, but the brand spends nothing on marketing and sometimes skimps on components like memory, SSD, and operating system to keep the price down. The models from Colorful are also worthy of mention: the manufacturer’s assortment contains powerful models with an attractive design and an adequate price.

Thanks to constant discounts on Aliexpress, it is possible to purchase a much more powerful device than those described in the article. For example, a model from an unnamed brand at the time of writing the article cost about 49000 R including discount. For this money, a powerful 12th generation processor, a fingerprint scanner, a metal case and 16 GB of RAM are offered. This laptop is a higher class in terms of characteristics than the devices from the article.

But keep in mind that buying a laptop from an unknown manufacturer is an additional risk. You may encounter long delivery times, driver searches, service, and quality issues with individual laptop components. Keyboard engraving in Russian letters is often required, unless you are used to touch typing. This is only suitable for experienced users who are able to solve such difficulties on their own.

/ Matebook-D16-Review /

Huawei Matebook D 16 Review-a light laptop with a large screen for 80 000 p

How to choose an inexpensive laptop for work

I have been writing electronics and gadgets for different publications for many years. Based on my experience, I have identified several criteria that inexpensive laptops for work should meet.

Dimensions. Notebook dimensions are determined by the built-in display size. I looked at models with the most popular diagonals from 14 to 15.6″. They usually weigh about 2 kg and can be carried around in a backpack, but the screen is large enough for tables and working with two windows.

Notebooks with a 17″ display are more convenient for working with text, but they are hard to carry around. Large models are suitable for motorists and those who do not take the laptop out of the house, but for our selection they are not versatile enough.

The selection also did not include the most compact models with a diagonal of 13″ or less. A good compact laptop cannot be cheap, so there are few successful models in the segment under 50,000 R. In addition, working with tables on such a display can be inconvenient.

Performance. In this price range, you should not count on high power. But a working laptop should load quickly, open Adobe Photoshop and a browser with a large number of tabs without any problems, not to mention instant messengers and an office suite for texts and spreadsheets.

In this article, we mainly present basic modifications of laptops – there are almost always higher-performance versions on sale. For example, with a powerful Core i7 processor instead of Core i3 and more memory to open more windows at the same time. These options sometimes cost 50% more.

/list/used-macbooks-guide/

Which MacBook to buy off hand in 2023: 5 proven models from 27,000 R

Connectors. I used to use a Macbook Air and was frustrated by the need to always take a card reader adapter with me. The problem with the lack of connectors is also found in cheaper laptops. Therefore, I chose models with a minimum set of ports for autonomous work: modern USB Type-C, classic USB Type-A, HDMI for connecting a monitor. The memory card slot is an important and nice addition.

The Type-C connector on laptops is the most controversial, as its functions can vary greatly from device to device. For example, for top models, you can simultaneously charge a laptop through one connector, output video to an external monitor, and connect a fast external SSD. Whereas the budget ones only transfer data and occasionally connect screens.

In the description of a laptop, the parameters of the connectors and the possibility of charging via Type-C are usually indicated. If the laptop supports it, the battery can be replenished from a power bank or even an adapter from some phones.

Vpn enabled router: Best VPN Routers of 2023

Опубликовано: April 17, 2023 в 4:36 pm

Автор:

Категории: Miscellaneous

Best VPN routers of 2023

When you purchase through links on our site, we may earn an affiliate commission. Here’s how it works.

(Image credit: Future)

The best VPN routers to make use of your virtual private network connection

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is an essential service for maintaining your online privacy, and it’s really easy to use: install an app, tap a button, and you’re protected in seconds.

But what if you’re looking to protect everything in your home? Use a VPN router, and there’s no need to install apps everywhere and learn how they work. Connect your phones, tablets, laptops, smart TVs, and anything Wi-Fi-enabled to the router, and it automatically shields all your online activities from attackers.

We’ve uncovered the routers with the best VPN functionality, the most capable firmware, and how widely the top VPN providers support them.

Of course, you’re also looking for a great router, so we also pay close attention to design, connectivity, speed, coverage, and bonus features such as parental controls.

So, read on for our list of the best VPN routers, and at the end, we have some expert advice on how to sign up for the best router VPN for your needs.

  • Here are the best wireless routers for your home network
  • For boosting your network, these are the best Wi-Fi extenders

Picking the right VPN for your needs

Why you can trust TechRadar
We spend hours testing every product or service we review, so you can be sure you’re buying the best. Find out more about how we test.

To complement your VPN router, here are our guides to picking the VPN for your requirements:

  • The best VPN services
  • The fastest VPN for speed
  • The best VPN for gaming
  • The best VPN for Kodi
  • The best free VPN right now

The best VPN routers of 2023 in full

Asus RT-AX58U (Image credit: Asus)

1. Asus RT-AX58U

A fantastic budget VPN router

Specifications

Speed: up to 3000Mbps

Connectivity: 1x Gigabit WAN, 4x Gigabit Ethernet, 1x USB 3. 1

Features: Router app, MU-MIMO, Traffic Analyzer, Adaptive QoS, AiProtection Pro, Parental Control

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Strong Wi-Fi 6 performance

+

Simple set-up

+

Good parental controls

Reasons to avoid

Dual-band only

Wi-Fi 6 is the cutting-edge technology in networking, with powerful features delivering faster speeds, greater coverage, and the ability to handle even more simultaneous connections. That often means it’s expensive, but not here: with the Asus RT-AX58U, you get all the core Wi-Fi 6 functionality and performance for an absolute bargain of a price.

Compare it to the high-end Wi-Fi 6 competition and it doesn’t match up everywhere. It’s dual, not tri-band. The CPU is triple, rather than quad-core. There’s no 2.5Gbps port, and you ‘only’ get one USB connection. But while this might be a problem for demanding users, the reality is there’s more than enough power here for many homes.

That’s especially true when it comes to VPNs. There’s built-in support for connecting the Asus RT-AX58U to a VPN provider; a built-in VPN server enables securely connecting to your home network while you’re on the move; and the comprehensive dashboard gives you many ways to customize the router to suit your exact needs.

Read our full Asus RT-AX58U review.

(Image credit: ExpressVPN)

2. ExpressVPN Aircove

A speedy Wi-Fi 6 router with ExpressVPN built in

Specifications

Speed: Up to 1,200Mbps (180 Mbps via VPN for multiple simultaneous connections)

Connectivity: 4x Gigabit Ethernet, 1x USB 3.0 (currently unused)

Features: 1.2 GHz 64-bit Quad-Core CPU, 512 MB RAM, 128 MB flash storage, ExpressVPN pre-installed

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Quick and easy setup 

+

Speedy Wi-Fi 6-powered performance 

+

Connect up to five locations simultaneously 

Reasons to avoid

VPN features work with ExpressVPN only 

Most VPN routers offer a lot of power and flexibility, but can take a while and some technical knowledge to set up. If you’re in a hurry, or just prefer an easier life, ExpressVPN’s Aircove is refreshingly different: you’ll probably have it up and running in under ten minutes, even if you’ve no VPN expertise at all.

You will need a separate ExpressVPN subscription to connect, but once that’s set up, Aircove’s well-designed, jargon-free dashboard ensures it’s even easier to operate than most VPN apps.

There are welcome bonus features, too. Aircove’s groups enable connecting up to five locations simultaneously, for instance, so some devices can use your fastest local server, while your TV connects to your favorite streaming location, and a laptop uses the best server for your work.

Although Aircove excels on the VPN front, there’s plenty to like about it as a router, too. Wi-Fi 6 support gives you potential speeds of up to 1,200Mbps, a 1.2 GHz 64-bit Quad-Core CPU has the power to handle dozens of simultaneous connections, there are four gigabit Ethernet ports for nearby devices, and a decent 1,600 square feet coverage to help you reach everything else.

Read our full ExpressVPN Aircove review.

(Image credit: TP-Link)

3. TP-Link Archer GX90

High-speed gaming power (and quality VPN features, too)

Specifications

Speed: IEEE 802.11ax/ac/n/a 5 GHz, IEEE 802.11ax/n/b/g 2.4 GHz

Connectivity: 1× 2.5 Gbps WAN/LAN, 1× Gigabit WAN/LAN, 3× Gigabit LAN, 1× USB 3.0, 1× USB 2.0

Features: 4.8 Gbps Game Band, Game Accelerator, MU-MIMO

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

High-end gaming performance

+

Set up a VPN without changing firmware

+

Built-in VPN server 

Reasons to avoid

Bulky

Expensive 

If the TP-Link Archer GX90’s bulk, eight pointy antennas eye-catching black/ red color scheme makes you think this isn’t for office users, you’d be right: it’s a high-end, high-performance gaming router which comes absolutely stuffed with advanced features and technologies.

We’re not just talking Wi-Fi 6, tri-band speeds, for instance. The GX90 can set up a dedicated Gaming Band network with 4.8Gbps speeds all on its own. Connectivity options include 2.5Gbps Ethernet and a couple of USB ports (there are 3x regular Gigabit ports, too), and you can set it up as a mesh network with other TP-Link routers.

On the VPN front, there’s no need to use new firmware, because the TP-Link Archer GX90 has built-in support for connecting to VPN providers via OpenVPN, L2TP or PPTP. Need more? No problem: the GX90 also has a built-in VPN server, allowing you to securely access your home network from anywhere in the world.

Read our full TP-Link Archer GX90 review.

(Image credit: Asus)

4. Asus RT-AC86U router

A robust VPN router with performance as loud its design

Specifications

Speed: 802.11ac 1734 Mbps down

Connectivity: 5 x Gigabit LAN, 1 x USB 2.0, 1 x USB 3.0

Features: MU-MIMO, Traffic Analyzer, Adaptive QoS WTFast Gamers Private Network

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Extensive firmware

+

Great speed and coverage

Reasons to avoid

Complex firmware

Divisive looks

Most routers look dull in the extreme, but the Asus RT-AC86U angled surfaces and red slashes give it just a little more visual appeal. The case has some issues on the ergonomics front – it has to stand up, there’s no wall mounting option – but unusual pluses include buttons to handle tasks buried in the firmware (disable the radios, turn off the lights.)

There’s plenty to like about what’s inside that casing, too. The CPU is ‘only’ dual core but it’s a 1.8GHz model; there are four Gigabit lan ports, and two USB; MU-MIMO technology supports theoretical transfer speed of up to 2,900Mbps, and Asus’ 5GHz Quad-Stream system optimizes traffic but the best gaming and streaming performance.

Browse through the comprehensive dashboard and you’ll find an array of other options, including the ability to run the router as a VPN client or server. Need more power? No problem, you can install third-party firmware for even great control. 

The Asus RT-AC86U may not have quite the leading-edge technologies of other routers in this list, but it’s less than half the price of some, yet still offers enough power for many users, and that seems like a great deal to us.

Read our full Asus RT-AC86U review.

(Image credit: Synology)

5. Synology RT6600ax

A do-everything VPN router for high-end home and business users

Specifications

Speed: Tri-band Wi-Fi; up to 6600 Mbps

Connectivity: 2.5Gb WAN/LAN, 3x Gigabit Ethernet LAN/WAN; 1x USB 3.2 Gen 1

Features: Wi-Fi 6, 5.9GHz support, tri-band, VPN client, network segmentation, parental controls

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Many advanced network features 

+

Works as a VPN client and server 

Reasons to avoid

Overkill for basic home Wi-Fi requirements 

The Synology RT6600ax may look like another bland, boring, identikit router, but beneath that boxy casing is an exceptional product for business, gaming and other demanding users.

You’re after speed, say? Tri-band Wi-Fi delivers up to 6,600Mbps, and our real-world tests revealed excellent performance. Configurability? The router can operate multiple Wi-Fi networks, each with their own custom settings and rules. Security? There’s a comprehensive firewall, exceptional content filtering, optional threat and intrusion detection, and a whole lot more.

It’s a similar story with the VPN features. Sure, you can set it up to connect to most of the big providers, but that’s just the start. There’s also a VPN server which gives you remote access to your network, and the SMB-friendly ability  to remotely operate PCs and servers.

If your VPN needs are simple, just a little Netflix unblocking occasionally, the Synology RT6600ax is overkill in the extreme. But if you’re a power user, an SMB, anyone with more complex requirements, this router offers a phenomenal set of features for a bargain price.

Read our full Synology RT6600ax review.

(Image credit: Asus)

6. Asus RT-AX86U

An impressive all-round VPN router

Specifications

Speed: 802.11ax up to 5700 Mbps down

Connectivity: 4 x Gigabit LAN, Gigabit Wan, 2.5G Wan, 2x USB 3. 2

Features: MU-MIMO, Traffic Analyzer, Adaptive QoS, Parental Control, NVIDIA Geforce Now Cloud Gaming Optimization

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Fast Wi-Fi 6 performance

+

Gaming-focused

+

Security features

Reasons to avoid

Not cheap

The Asus RT-AX86U isn’t the cheapest router around, but it’s good value for what you’re getting: Wi-Fi 6 performance, a 2.5Gbps wired port, two USB 3.2 ports, and gaming optimization for GeForce Now to keep your connection running smoothly.

Setup is relatively easy, with a browser-based dashboard offering the most depth and control, while a simpler app is on hand for Android and iOS.

Surprisingly capable extras include built-in malware protection from Trend Micro, while the extensive parental controls go well beyond what you’ll see from most of the competition (and Asus doesn’t charge you extra for them, either.)

The router held up well in our tests, delivering above-average speeds in even the most difficult-to-reach corners of the office.

And as with other Asus routers, the excellent interface makes it easy to set up and manage a connection to your preferred VPN.

Read our full Asus RT-AX86U review.

(Image credit: TP-Link)

7. TP-Link Archer C5400 v2

A powerful VPN router for individuals are enterprises

Specifications

Speed: 802.11ac 5GHz down: up to 2,167 Mbps, 2.4GHz down: up to 1,000 Mbps

Connectivity: 4 x LAN, WAN, USB 3.0, USB 2.0

Features: MU-MIMO, Tri-band Wi-Fi, 8 external antennas, Alexa voice control

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Fast and powerful

+

Alexa and IFTTT support

Reasons to avoid

Expensive

The TP-Link Archer C5400 v2 has an odd design which somehow manages to look both

distinctive and dull, all at the same time (which although it’s not ideal, is quite an achievement, when you think about it.) But if you value functionality over form, don’t scroll down just yet, because this router has a great deal to offer.

The eight antennas support four 1,000Mbps streams on the 2.4Ghz band, for instance, while the two 5Ghz channels also have four streams running up to 2,167Mbps. Although the four gigabit Ethernet ports can’t handle that kind of bandwidth, TP-Link’s support for link aggregation means (if your laptop or NAS supports it) you can use two Ethernet ports as if they were one, doubling throughput: very impressive.

This level of enterprise power normally comes with a degree of complexity, but the TP-Link Archer C5400 v2 does a lot to keep its functions accessible to regular consumers. An app and some very clear setup instructions walk you through the first steps, and TP-Link’s Router Skill even allows you to carry out common tasks via simple Alexa commands.

Read our full TP-Link Archer C5400 review.

(Image credit: Linksys)

8. Linksys WRT32X Gaming Router

An excellent VPN router for gamers

Specifications

Speed: : AC3200

Connectivity: : 1 x Gigabit WAN, 4 x Gigabit LAN, 1 x USB 3. 0, 1 x eSATA/USB 2.0

Features: : Killer Prioritization Engine, Customized Firmware, 1.8GHZ Dual-Core CPU, MU-MIMO

Today’s Best Deals

Reasons to buy

+

Great Wi-Fi speed

+

Easy to use firmware

Reasons to avoid

Very expensive

The Linksys WRT32X is an impressive gaming-focused router with a smart prioritization engine which automatically optimizes your gaming traffic, cutting latency and boosting performance.

The hardware is a little more ordinary: dual-band, a dual-core CPU, four gigabit ports, one USB 3.0 port, and one mildly surprising extra in an eSATA USB 2.0 port (handy for a network-attached storage device.)

The firmware is a definite plus, crammed with handy performance tweaks and essential settings. They’re well-presented, too, and far easier to access than you’ll see with many more business-oriented routers.

But if VPN functionality is top of your priority list, the good news is that you can install open-source firmware to give you extra functionality and connect to most of the best providers. Many VPNs have tutorials to explain exactly what’s involved. As an example, check out ExpressVPN’s guide here.  

Read our full Linksys WRT32X Gaming Router review

We’ve also featured the best Wi-Fi routers.

The top VPN to install on your router:

(Image credit: ExpressVPN)

ExpressVPN

The best overall VPN

Specifications

Number of servers: 3,000+

Server locations: 160 in 94 countries

Maximum devices supported: 5

Money-back guarantee: 30 days

Today’s Best Deals

ExpressVPN 12 month

$6.67

/mth

ExpressVPN 6 month

$9.99

/mth

ExpressVPN 1 month

$12.95

/mth

Visit Siteat ExpressVPN

Reasons to buy

+

Dedicated app for routers

+

Seriously fast connections

+

Great reliability means no drop outs

+

Excellent for streaming

Reasons to avoid

A little more expensive than some

Performance-wise, this British Virgin Islands-based provider delivered unrivalled results in our performance tests. However, what makes ExpressVPN our top pick for installing on routers is the fact that it delivers a dedicated router application – which is more than most of the competition.

Aside from its ease of installation, though, ExpressVPN also provides fast, reliable connections that you can count on, meaning you won’t suddenly find yourself having to reset your router. Keeping your VPN on all day has never been a more viable option.

On the security front, ‘best in class’ 256-bit encryption is in place, along with support for the proprietary Lightway, OpenVPN, L2TP/IPsec, and PPTP protocols, and a private, encrypted DNS. ExpressVPN doesn’t log any traffic data, DNS queries, or anything that could be used to identify the user.

A quick glance at the pricing scheme shows that the service costs more than most VPNs, and you don’t get to try it out through a free trial. However, there is a 30-day 100% money-back guarantee available, so you can try before you buy. Going the yearly route is the most affordable option of the three price plans on offer. The packages available are:

  • [$12.95 a month] 1-month
  • [$9.99 a month] 6-months – $59.95
  • [$6.66 a month] 15-months [3 free months] – $99.95

Frequently Asked Questions

How to choose the best VPN routers for you?

When selecting the best VPN router for yourself, start with checking the router’s installation process. If you’re not familiar with routers, then a simple and swift setup process will be apt for you. 

You’ll want to consider how many bands the router supports. If you have a mixture of old devices and new ones at your home or office, then it’ll help to have multiple bands that cover 2.4Ghz and 5Ghz. This will distribute the internet traffic and ensure faster online speeds for all devices. 

Make sure to evaluate the router’s speed and connectivity options, along with additional features like parental controls, gaming optimization, and voice control. 

Lastly, you’ll want to consider the router’s design, coverage, and pricing.

The best VPN routers: How we test

When testing the best VPN routers, we first looked at their design, ease of setup, and connectivity ports. We checked their performance in terms of speed, range, and strength of coverage. 

We used Ookla to test the speeds with a file download, and we also tested it against our everyday network usage to give you an idea of its real-world performance. 

We checked the routers’ additional features, like parental controls, voice control, and the option to install software other than the default one that the router ships with. 

We also considered what type of users the routers would be best suited for, and their pricing.

Round up of today’s best deals

ExpressVPN 12 month

$6.67

/mth

View

Sign up to the TechRadar Pro newsletter to get all the top news, opinion, features and guidance your business needs to succeed!

Contact me with news and offers from other Future brandsReceive email from us on behalf of our trusted partners or sponsors

Collin is the B2B Hardware Editor for TechRadar Pro. He has been in journalism for years, with experience in small and large markets, including Gearadical, DailyBeast, FutureNet, and more.

Collin is an experienced individual who has an abundance of knowledge when it comes to all things professional hardware. He is the go-to subject matter expert for TechRadar Pro and focuses on standing desks, office chairs, business laptops, “pro” monitors, and other similar topics. With his in-depth understanding of these areas, Collin can provide invaluable insights and advice to readers looking to make informed decisions about their hardware investments.

The fastest VPN for outright speed in 2023

When you purchase through links on our site, we may earn an affiliate commission. Here’s how it works.

(Image credit: ExpressVPN)

There are many factors that go into deciding on the best VPN for you. Security, privacy, geo-unblocking – the list goes on and on. But what’s most important for many is outright speed – and we’ve found out which providers can claim to be the fastest of the bunch.

Speed is a critical metric for these services as well, because VPNs work by sending all your internet traffic via your chosen provider’s secure server (twice, in some cases) — that’s a lot of extra potential latency. Thankfully, by going for one of the best fast VPNs, you can mostly avoid any slowdown completely.

Depending on the robustness of the company’s network and the number of servers it offers (with closer servers generally providing better speeds), some VPNs barely impact your connection. And we’ve tested all the top providers out there on their speed to make sure that you can confidently pick out a provider that won’t slow you down – especially if you’re using your service to stream video or play games, where having fast VPN speeds is a priority.

And to be obvious, the list below considers more than purely speed to establish the rankings. We’ve seen some mega fast VPNs that don’t have the goods in other areas to justify a place among our recommendations.

Today’s top 3 best fast VPNs

1. Surfshark – easy to use VPN that’s great value
Having upped their speeds recently, Surfshark keeps giving us reason to recommend. It’s still full of features and excellent at unblocking restricted services in 99 countries. At less than $2.50 USD per month, it’s a reasonably priced option that’s super simple to use.

2. Hide.me VPN – some of the fastest speeds on test
Nord pips it to the top spot because of its all-round VPN game, but Hide.me has the goods when it comes to pure speed. When we fired used WireGuard in the US, we witnessed astonishing speeds of 900Mbps on our 1GB line – pretty much the very fastest we saw in our testing.

3. NordVPN – one of the biggest names in VPN
It’s no surprise that one of the most famous names in virtual private networks is also one of the fastest out there. It’s the consistency from region-to-region that really impresses. And NordVPN delivers when it comes to security, usability and streaming service unblocking, too.

The fastest VPNs 2023

1. Surfshark

Excellent, great value VPN service that scores well in every area

Max speed tested: 950Mbps | Number of servers: 3,200 | Overall VPN ranking: 3

Eye-catching prices

Unlimited connections

Pause VPN feature

Apps can look a little complicated

Below-par OpenVPN speeds

Windows kill switch still buggy

In addition to being in the top three on our list of the best VPNs, Surfshark can also boast that they are one of the fastest as well. With speeds in our latest testing hitting up to 950Mbps (from 790Mbps previously), Surfshark has earned itself a spot as our pick for the fastest VPN. The OpenVPN speeds weren’t great, however, but in most cases WireGuard will be the go to anyway. 

When you sign up for Surfshark, the perks don’t end with just speed, though. Surfshark unblocks a variety of top streaming services, allows for unlimited simultaneous connections, and as a fantastic support site. 

Streaming content is a non-issue here as well, with Surfshark able to unblock everything from Netflix to Amazon Prime to Disney Plus. The available apps are a bit more complex than they really need to be, but that also means there are loads of features to be had. Even the Android and iOS apps are extremely user-friendly and offer many features that other providers don’t surface on their mobile apps. 

There’s really no question whether Surfshark is a stellar, all around (and fastest!) VPN. The speeds speak for themselves, and all of what Surfshark has to offer otherwise really rounds out as the complete package. Check out our full Surfshark VPN review for all the details. 

Today’s best Surfshark deals


(Image credit: Hide.Me)

2. Hide.me

A new entry on our speed chart that’s really impressed our testers

Max speed tested: 880Mbps | Number of servers: 2,000+/75+ | Overall VPN ranking: 8

Hide. me – 24 Months

$2.59

/mth

Hide.me – 6 Months

$5.83

/mth

Hide.me – 1 Month

$9.95

/mth

Visit Siteat Hide.me

Extraordinary WireGuard speeds

No slouch on OpenVPN either

Highly configurable service

Try it for free

Some security quibbles

Over on our main VPN chart, Hide.me has been one of our biggest climbers in recent tests. One of the few independent providers among the big boys, the Malaysian-based company has a lot of going for it.

But undeniably, its most eye-catching asset from our in-depth testing was during our speed evaluations from the US and UK. Knowing that Hide.me takes this aspect seriously from the fact that it supports the ability to run in the Windows kernel for better performance, we had high hopes. But when we turned on the WireGuard protocol (available across platforms) on our 1Gbps+ cable connection, we had to check it multiple times to believe what we were seeing. The US test clocked in consistently at an eye-watering 900Mbps, while it wasn’t far off in the UK at an average of 700Mbps.

And if you know that you’ll be using your VPN for activities where WireGuard just won’t fit, then the results of our OpenVPN testing was almost as impressive. The speeds we recorded were reliably over the 400Mbps second-mark on both sides of the Atlantic, with highs of 580Mbps in the US.

Outside pure speeds, Hide.me is nice and straightforward to use for VPN newbies, while also having plenty of configurable options for anybody who wants to go a bit deeper. And the service has really upped its game of late when it comes to unblocking geo-restricted material, coming up trumps in our streaming testing on services like US Netflix, Disney Plus and BBC iPlayer. There was the odd kill-switch niggle though, and if Hide.me really wants to mix with the big boys then we’re going to want to see a nice fresh VPN audit.

Today’s best Hide.me deals

Hide.me – 24 Months

$2.59

/mth

View

Hide.me – 6 Months

$5.83

/mth

View

Hide.me – 1 Month

$9. 95

/mth

View


(Image credit: Future)

3. NordVPN

One of the biggest names in VPN really delivers

Max US speed tested: 820Mbps | Number of servers/locations: 5,400+/80+ | Overall VPN ranking: 2

Super speeds consistently

Superb for streaming

Stunning feature set

Great to use

Not our favorite mobile apps

NordVPN is fast becoming one of those brand names that’s just synonymous with the product itself – a bit like Hoover or Tannoy. And a good reason for its huge popularity (as well as all the advertising it does) is because of its speed.

When we tested it via US servers, we found connections speeds of up to 760Mbps when you use its own WireGuard-based NordLynx protocol – that’s way up on the heights of 630Mb that we got from ExpressVPN. Now, there aren’t too many homes around that have broadband as fast as that anyway, so don’t expect your streaming or downloading speeds to suffer very much at all if you have NordVPN switched on in the background.

We also found that NordVPN has nailed things in terms of consistency on global servers, too. The UK speeds we saw, for example, were mostly on a par with the US. That’s great news for travelers or people trying to access streaming feeds from other countries.

Outside that, NordVPN really comes good in terms of security and privacy. Its no-logs policy is independently audited, and it brings unique features like Double VPN and Onion Over technology to the table to ensure that your private details will never be leaked.

And if you’ve got the need for speed, we reckon it’s because you’re probably looking for a top streaming VPN. Nord has you covered on that front, too – it nails Netflix, unhooks Hulu, delves into Disney+ and unblocks BBC iPlayer.

Today’s best NordVPN deals


(Image credit: TorGuard)

4. TorGuard

Fast and Furious

Max US speed tested: 950+Mbps | Number of servers: 3,000+ | Overall VPN ranking: 17

TorGuard 3 Years

$3. 89

/mth

TorGuard 1 Year

$4.99

/mth

TorGuard 1 Month

$9.99

/mth

Visit Siteat TorGuard VPN

Extremely fast WireGuard 

Highly configurable

Up to 8 connections on standard plan

Apps can be overwhelming

No audit

Support site is subpar

TorGuard isn’t the tops in our overall list of best VPNs, but it’s certainly one of the fastest. With WireGuard speeds up to 950Mbps, as well as fast OpenVPN, it sits well above many others in terms of sheer speed. It’s not necessarily for everyone, but it’s an outstanding option when fast means business. 

Built by technical experts, for technical experts, TorGuard has a target audience and hits it well. The apps can be very overwhelming to new users, but for those that need extensive customization, the options are there. There are some inconsistencies between platforms as well, but not enough that anyone should steer clear.

In our testing, we were able to unblock Netflix in the US, Channel 4 and 9 Now — but that’s about it. There is fast email support, but the support site itself is a bit lacking in some key areas. We’d love to put TorGuard up higher on our best list, but it’s the little things that keep it sitting toward the bottom — of which speed isn’t one. 

The fact of the matter is that TorGuard doesn’t improve on some of the more “mainstream” options like streaming because it doesn’t have to. They clearly know what they’re doing — just look at the numbers — and are absolutely okay with doing what they do best.

Today’s best TorGuard VPN deals

TorGuard 3 Years

$3.89

/mth

View

TorGuard 1 Year

$4.99

/mth

View

TorGuard 1 Month

$9.99

/mth

View


Fastest VPN results comparison

Just want to know the raw speeds that we discovered in our testing? You can see our results from late 2022 in the table below, listed with their top US speeds. The table features some of the best providers tested, together with a few others that had particularly noteworthy results (good and bad!).

Just remember, this table is based purely on speeds, which is why we curated the providers that combine maximum performance, consistent speeds across regions and protocols, and other qualities in our countdown above.

Swipe to scroll horizontally

Row 0 – Cell 0 WireGuard (or Proprietary) OpenVPN
ExpressVPN 420-630Mbps 375-385Mbps
TorGuard 800-950Mbps 630Mbps
NordVPN 730-760Mbps 220-250Mbps
Surfshark 720-790Mbps 130-140Mbps
PIA 320Mbps 170-190Mbps
Proton VPN 360-670Mbps 200-440Mbps
CyberGhost 830-850Mbps 300-415Mbps
Hotspot Shield 300-310Mbps 200-210Mbps
Hide. me 550-900 Mbps 440-450Mbps
IPVanish 880-890Mbps 120-160Mbps
Windscribe 200-490Mbps 120Mbps
Mullvad 740-820Mbps 480-490Mbps
TunnelBear 310-380Mbps
PureVPN 180-640 Mbps 120 Mbps

Fastest VPN FAQ

Which VPN is fastest?

In our latest round of speed testing, we saw some blistering speeds from a number of providers. But top of the pile in terms of consistently fast VPN connections in a number of different server locations is Surfshark VPN.

When using WireGuard in the US, Surfshark consistently hit speeds of 950Mbps when in the US. That’s quite extraordinary, and means you can have Surfshark quietly protecting you at all times in the background, knowing that it won’t cause you any lag. 

How to choose the fastest VPN

Many VPNs claim to be the fastest around, but as you can imagine, often that’s an idle boast. In this article, we are going to pinpoint the providers that we’ve found really deliver on the performance front, going by our reviews and testing.

Of course, speed isn’t the be-all-and-end-all, and we always expect solid security and privacy from any VPN. As mentioned, broad server coverage is important here in terms of getting a fast and stable connection. And user-friendly native clients never hurt.

Bear in mind that the VPN won’t be the only thing affecting the performance of your internet connection, and this can vary depending on your ISP, the time of day (particularly whether it’s peak traffic times), and also the status of the service or website you’re using.

Methodology: how we speed test VPNs

It takes us a long time to test the top VPNs every six months, and the speed testing is one of the most time-consuming parts.

To put every provider on an even playing surface, we use the same Windows set-up for each one on an Ethernet-based 1Gbps connection. Using a combination of at least three respected speed testing sites, we test our normal connection speed with the all VPNs turned off. Then – one by one – we turn on our VPNs, testing the speeds with at least five tests and then taking the median average as our result.

If the default VPN protocol for the service was OpenVPN, we then do the same thing with WireGuard or its own proprietary protocol (i.e. Lightway for Express, NordLynx for Nord, Catapult Hydra for Hotspot Shield, etc.) – or vice versa.

To ensure a fair test, we do this in the morning and the evening. And because connection speeds can change around the world, we test in the US and the UK to try and give the fairest representation possible.

(Image credit: Shutterstock)

What is the fastest free VPN?

When it comes to getting the best performance from your VPN, both in terms of speed and other areas, we always recommend paying for your VPN. While free VPN tools are available, it’s wise to err on the side of caution, with many only able to maintain the infrastructure to run its VPN by logging and selling your information onto third parties. This means they’re really not as secure as you’d like.

That being said, with ProtonVPN offering above-average speeds, it may be worth trying out its free plan option before upgrading to reap the full benefits of its features and extensive list of servers. There are faster providers out there, so best to try and see what works for you. 

Most other VPN services give you a courtesy window to try out the VPN with the safety blanket of an all-your-money-back-guarantee, spanning anywhere from 30 to 45 days.

Round up of today’s best deals

+2 months free

+3 MONTHS FREE

Hide.me – 24 Months

$2.59

/mth

View

UP TO 1 YEAR FREE

TorGuard 3 Years

$3.89

/mth

View

Sign up to receive daily breaking news, reviews, opinion, analysis, deals and more from the world of tech.

Contact me with news and offers from other Future brandsReceive email from us on behalf of our trusted partners or sponsors

Adam is the Editorial Director of High-Yield content at Future. Leading an outstanding team, he oversees many articles the publisher produces about subscriptions and services including VPN, TV streaming, and broadband. In addition to identifying new e-commerce opportunities, he has produced extensive buying guides, how-to-watch content, deal news, and in-depth reviews. Adam’s work can be seen on numerous Future brands including TechRadar, Tom’s Guide, T3, TTR, Android Central, iMore, Windows Central, and Real Homes.

Best VPN routers for home – Surfshark, 2023

Recommend:

  • Compatible with all
  • devices

  • Unlimited connections
  • Protecting the entire home network

Get Surfshark

What is a VPN router (VPN router)?

Router with VPN (VPN – virtual private network) – this is a regular router, only with support for the VPN service. Such devices, in addition to accessing the devices of all family members to the Internet, ensure their protection on the network. Surfshark VPN is easy to set up on most routers. or buy a router with Surfshark pre-installed.

Why do I need a VPN router?

The VPN router has a number of important features that make it a useful (and essential) device. Let’s name some of them:

Protecting your entire home network

You have guests visiting and you’re worried that their devices might threaten the security of your network? A VPN router will save you from these risks. It protects all devices connected to it. You can continue to use your home Wi-Fi network without any additional security measures.

Connectivity

Worried that setting up all your home devices can be long and hassle? Do not worry! Once you set up a VPN router, you can forget about the settings. You no longer need to change settings or press the same button multiple times to secure every device on your home network.

24/7 VPN protection

Worried about your children not noticing security risks? Don’t worry – with a VPN router, you won’t have to enable their protection yourself. All your devices are always protected from the moment they connect to the VPN router’s network.

Security of incompatible devices

A simple and user-friendly app can be installed on your phone, laptop and TV. But what about a smart refrigerator or Alexa, which, when connected to the Internet, can be hacked by intruders? For devices that cannot install a VPN app, there is an alternative solution: a VPN router that protects your entire home network.

What to consider when choosing a VPN router?

In general, you should pay attention to the same characteristics as when choosing a regular router, as well as the specific parameters of the VPN router:

Frequency

Wi-Fi connection in the 2.4 GHz frequency band is not very fast, but it works more stable and in a larger radius. The 5 GHz frequency provides quality streaming, but is inferior in signal strength.

Speed

The higher the speed on any of the specified frequencies, the faster your connection will be. Almost always, 2.4 GHz routers will be inferior to 5 GHz routers in terms of connection speed, but in some cases the opposite is true.

Wireless specifications

A good router supports 802.11ac and has “multi-user mode, multiple inputs, multiple outputs” to distribute bandwidth efficiently among multiple devices.

Ease of use

The installation wizards and applications are essential tools for convenient and easy installation and management of the router through a modern web interface.

Ports

Port diversity is important for those who want to use the full functionality of the router by connecting other devices and peripherals to it.

ISP Compatibility

Before buying a new router, it’s important to make sure it will work on your ISP’s network. The importance of this parameter is obvious, but it is sometimes overlooked.

Top 5 VPN routers for home use

1 InvizBox 2 VPN Router

Pros:

  1. Preinstalled Surfshark
  2. Ease of use
  3. Multiple VPN Access Points
  4. Automatic security and feature updates
  5. Open source

Cons:

  1. 2 Ethernet ports

The InvizBox 2 VPN Router stands out on this list as it is configured with Surfshark for the ultimate in VPN ease and convenience.

2 Vilfo

Pros:

  1. Separate tunneling
  2. Availability of configurations required to use Surfshark
  3. Ease of use
  4. High speed with established VPN connection

Cons:

  1. Supports dual frequency operation but only allows one mode to be active at a time

The Vilfo VPN Router is great for use with Surfshark due to its fast connection and easy setup. All necessary Surfshark installations are already prepared for the user.

3 Synology RT2600AC

Pros:

  1. Fast connection speeds
  2. Ease of use
  3. Many ports

Cons:

  1. Rather high cost

Synology RT2600AC is a great VPN router for home use with excellent connection speeds and quality.

4 Gaming router Asus RT-AC86U AC2900 Dual Band Gigabit Wi-Fi

Pros:

  1. High speeds
  2. Optimization for games

Cons:

  1. Can be tricky to set up

If you love video streaming or online gaming, the Asus RT-AC86U router is a great choice.

5 Mini-router GLiNet GL-MT300N-V2 Mango

Pros:

  1. Low cost
  2. Small and mobile
  3. Easy to set up VPN

Cons:

  1. Wi-Fi speed limits
  2. No benefit of using multiple antennas

This is a small router that fits easily into your pocket. In addition, it is very easy to set up to use Surfshark VPN.

Other routers compatible with Surfshark

Try Surfshark

Try our service risk-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

If you are not sure if Surfshark will work on your router, you can test it in practice. With our 30-day money-back guarantee, you can enjoy all the benefits of a premium subscription risk-free during this period. Surfshark not working on your router? Have you changed your mind about using our service? Within 30 days you can unsubscribe from and get a refund of your payment.

Try Surfshark

FAQ

What are the limitations of VPN routers?

The characteristics of routers are not always optimal. You need to be aware of some possible downsides to using them:

  1. sometimes they are hard to set up;
  2. Changing the VPN server on the router is not as easy as using the app on a mobile device;
  3. The connection to the router is not secure.

Which routers does Surfshark recommend?

Our support team recommends the following routers that are compatible with our service:

  • NetDuma R1 – easy to set up;
  • ASUS routers: RT-N56U, RT-AC86U, DSL-AC51, RT-AC3200, AC68U, RT-N66U, AC66U, AC52U, RT-AC51U, AX88U, Rapture GT-AC2900.

Do you need a dedicated router for VPN connection?

Not always. Only some routers do not support VPN connection, and most of them are no longer in use. Most likely, your home router has VPN support.

How do I know if my router supports VPN connection?

You can check this by typing your router’s model name into the browser search bar and viewing its specifications. Most OpenVPN-enabled routers can support a Surfshark connection. And, as mentioned above, some VPN routers come with Surfshark already pre-installed and configured.

Secure Your Router Today

Get Surfshark

Use the best VPN router in 2023

Use the best VPN router in 2023 | ExpressVPN

Buy any subscription now and get 30 extra days free.

Don’t miss out! Get 4 months free when you purchase an annual subscription.

Enjoy the benefits of a VPN on all devices in your home Wi-Fi network – unlimited devices !

  • Protect devices where the VPN application cannot be installed
  • Suitable for Smart TVs and other devices
  • Connect to 5 locations at the same time
  • Protect devices where VPN cannot be installed
  • Suitable for Smart TVs and other devices
  • Connect to 5 locations at the same time 900 06

Buy ExpressVPNNeed a router? Try Aircove

  • iPhone/iPad
  • Android
  • Windows
  • Mac
  • Linux
  • Routers
  • Smart TVs
  • Game Consoles

ExpressVPN Aircove: Our own VPN router

Aircove is an ExpressVPN exclusive and the industry’s first Wi-Fi 6 router with VPN built in by default – protection. With it, you can immediately enjoy secure connections to ExpressVPN servers.

DetailsBuy Aircove*

*Outside the US? Buy a router from the FlashRouters website.

5 Reasons to Install a VPN Router

1. Enjoy VPN 24/7

Save time and keep yourself always protected by installing ExpressVPN on your router. All devices connected to your local home network will be securely protected, and our Network Lock kill switch will protect you from data leaks if your VPN connection drops.

2. Protect all your devices

Get the full benefits of a VPN on any device connected to your home network, including even those where you would normally not be able to install a VPN app (such as game consoles and smart TVs). Access your favorite online movie theaters and social networks in a more private and secure way.

3. Unlimited connections

Your VPN router will count as one of five devices that can be connected to ExpressVPN at the same time. But you can connect as many devices as you like to the router itself!

4. Quick Connections

Lightway next generation VPN protocol is our own development to provide a faster, more reliable and secure VPN connection.

5. Simple interface

You no longer have to deal with confusing settings menus – just one click to connect. Do you want not all devices to use the VPN connection? There is nothing easier. With device groups, you have everything under control.

Buy ExpressVPN

Device groups: 1 router, up to 5 locations

VPN Router allows you to secure all your devices while you can connect them all to the ExpressVPN network. And the device grouping feature allows you to connect to multiple VPN locations at once.

You can connect your devices the way you want – you can create five separate groups in total. This makes it possible to quickly change VPN locations depending on your needs. You can make a group for family or friends, a group of devices connected to a fixed location, or even a group of devices that don’t need a VPN connection. Try the new Device Groups feature today!

Learn more about Device Groups

Create a group now

Subtitles are available for this video, translated into different languages. Click on the “Subtitles (with)” button and select the desired language from the menu that opens.

Different server locations

Divide your devices into groups (maximum five), each of which will connect to a different VPN location.

Easily switch locations

Click or drag to change locations in seconds.

Uninterrupted VPN

When you change location, your connection remains stable.

Recommended VPN routers for home Wi-Fi networks

Wi-Fi 5

4-7 connected devices

Buy on Amazon

You have to do the installation yourself

Buy now

Buy on Flash Routers

line/iot

ExpressVPN already installed

Icon/Tabs

$20 promo code: expressvpn

Buy on FlashRouters

Dual-band Wi-Fi 6

Dozens of devices

Buy on Amazon

ExpressVPN already installed

Buy now

Only available in the US

Buy on FlashRouters 9000 3 line/iot

ExpressVPN already installed

Icon/Tabs

Available worldwide

Buy on FlashRouters

Wi-Fi 5

4-7 connected devices

Buy on Amazon

You have to do the installation yourself

Buy now

Buy on FlashRouters

line/iot

ExpressVPN already installed

Icon/Tabs

$20 promo code: expressvpn

Buy on FlashRouters

Setup guides on an already installed router

ExpressVPN firmware installation

Easier installation, easier use

Asus RT-AC56(U/R/S)
Asus RT-AC68U (up to v3)
Asus RT-AC87U
Linksys EA6200
Linksys WRT1200AC
Linksys WRT1900AC(S)
Linksys WRT3200ACM
Linksys WRT32X
Netgear R6300v2
Netgear R6400v2
Netgear Nighthawk R6700v3
Netgear Nighthawk R7000
Netgear Nighthawk R7000P

ExpressVPN manual setup

Harder to set up and use

Asus (other models)
D-Link
DD-WRT
Netduma
Sabai
tomato
TP Link
Xiaomi

World-class VPN router setup support

With ExpressVPN, you can easily set up a VPN connection on your home router yourself. Even if you run into problems, you can always contact ExpressVPN support at any time of the day or night, and the connection will be restored in a matter of minutes.

Buy ExpressVPN

Users love ExpressVPN solutions for routers

It’s simple and straightforward. Compared to third party firmware such as DD-WRT, this application is easy to set up, even for non-professionals.

I received a router already configured. All I had to do was plug it in and start using it. The interface is surprisingly simple compared to manually configuring the router. I tried to help my neighbor set up a VPN with another provider, it was very difficult and confusing.

Very user friendly router interface. A huge bonus for me was my own firmware without any complicated settings. Therefore, I use your product, which for me has no competitors.

Frequently Asked Questions

The fastest and most reliable way to set up VPN on your router is to install the ExpressVPN app for routers. If your router is not compatible with the app, you can manually set up an ExpressVPN connection using the OpenVPN protocol or buy a router that already has the ExpressVPN app installed.

Not every router can be turned into a VPN router, but most can. If your particular router model doesn’t support VPN, you can still use ExpressVPN by installing the apps on each of your devices.

Yes. If your router is connected to a VPN, then you do not need to install a VPN application on each of your devices. Just connect all devices to the router and they will be protected automatically.

ExpressVPN is supported by many popular router models (with more being added all the time). Check if your router is listed below.

The following router models are compatible with the ExpressVPN router app:

  • Asus RT-AC56(U/R/S)

  • Asus RT-AC68Uv3

  • Asus RT-AC87U

  • Linksys EA6200 Linksys WRT1200AC

  • Linksys WRT1900ACS

  • Linksys WRT1900ACS V2

  • Linksys WRT1900AC 13J1

  • Linksys WRT1900AC 13J2

  • Linksys WRT3200ACM

  • Linksys WRT32X

  • Netgear R6300v2

  • Netgear Nighthawk R6400v2

  • Netgear Nighthawk R6700v3

  • Netgear Nighthawk R7000

  • 0P

The following router models allow you to manually set up a connection to ExpressVPN:

A VPN router is a router that has been modified to connect directly to a VPN. This feature allows the router to extend VPN protection to every device that connects to it.

Yes! FlashRouters offers third-party routers with the built-in ExpressVPN app. These routers have been pre-configured with the ExpressVPN firmware, which means you’ll be able to use the VPN right away. Just turn on the router and connect.

You can also get $20 off any VPN router by using the code “expressvpn” at checkout with FlashRouters!

If you live in the US, you can buy Aircove, ExpressVPN’s own design, the industry’s first and only Wi-Fi router with VPN firmware built in by default. Learn more about Aircove.

We highly recommend this. If you want every device on your home network to be protected by a VPN, then a VPN router is a must.

Excellent
4.7 out of 5 based on 18935 reviews

ExpressVPN Benefits

TrustedServer Technology

TrustedServer Technology sets a new standard for security and privacy protection – audited.

Quick Setup

Want to connect to ExpressVPN? There is nothing easier. Buy a subscription, download the app and connect!

Bypass ISP bandwidth limits

ExpressVPN allows you to bypass ISP bandwidth limits and forget about buffering.

Increased anonymity

Change your device’s IP address and location to prevent metadata and your online activities from being tracked.

Content from anywhere in the world

Access all the apps and services you need for work and play.

Live Chat Help

If you’re having trouble using any of the ExpressVPN apps, you can contact ExpressVPN support 24 hours a day.

Buy ExpressVPN

30

DAYS

MONEY BACK GUARANTEE

Test VPN for your home router risk-free

If you don’t like the quality, we’ll refund your money.

Install the ExpressVPN app on your home router and secure your internet connection! We offer a 30 day money back guarantee.

Fujifilm xt30: FUJIFILM X-T30 II | Cameras

Опубликовано: April 16, 2023 в 4:36 pm

Автор:

Категории: Miscellaneous

FUJIFILM X-T30 II | Cameras

Inspired by Photographers

Every element of FUJIFILM X-T30 II has been designed with photographers in mind. From the dial-based operation, and compact, lightweight body, to the latest-generation APS-C sensor, it lights up the imagination and inspires creativity. What’s more, X-T30 II fuses cutting edge, convenient features – such as a rear touchscreen and a discreet built-in flash – with a vintage aesthetic charm to make photography a truly immersive experience.

X-Trans CMOS 4 sensor

The fourth-generation X-Trans CMOS 4 sensor sits at the heart of X-T30 II. The 26.1MP back-illuminated imaging sensor minimize noise, while also extending sensitivity to ISO160. Additionally, the unique structure of the X-Trans color filter array reduces moiré and false colors, without the need for an optical low pass filter.

X-Processor 4

The quad-core X-Processor 4 works with the X-Trans CMOS 4 sensor to provide an image processing combination that is capable of delivering various Film Simulation options, opening doors to new levels of creativity through how they each interpret colors and tones. Significant enhancements have also been made to the camera’s ability to track moving subjects, optimizing autofocus for both stills and its powerful 4K/30P video capabilities.

Perfect Color to Define

Your Photographic Style

Great images need great color and Fujifilm’s outstanding legacy in color science, perfected by combining more than 85 years of expertise and knowledge, delivers on every image that is created. Each Film Simulation produces specially formulated depth, saturation, and tonality that needs little-or-no post production work.

Film Simulation Modes

Photographers and filmmakers can enjoy the creative freedom and unique look and feel of 18 different Film Simulations on X-T30 II. Each Film Simulation is precisely engineered to reproduce colors and tones from Fujifilm’s most popular analog films and some of photography’s longest-standing photo finishing processes. With your favorite Film Simulation, you can make images or video with a consistent look, transfer them to a smartphone or computer, then immediately post to social media or a blog.

Adjustable Settings

X-T30 II makes it easy to create your own distinctive visual style by combining Film Simulations with other effects, including film grain texture, color depth, clarity, sharpness, and highlight and shadow tones. All these adjustments are displayed live in the EVF and on the LCD touchscreen, for you to create great-looking effects and save them as presets.

Best In Class

Autofocusing

X-T30 II’s advanced autofocus uses densely arranged phase detection pixels and advanced algorithms to achieve best-in-class autofocus. Reaching blistering speeds and working across the frame, X-T30 II ensures you’re perfectly equipped to frame every opportunity.

Movie Feature

Many of today’s cameras have a 4K video output, but X-T30 II uniquely shoots footage oversampled from an original 6K signal. This means the camera delivers high-resolution footage with relatively low noise and stunning sharpness. It also supports filming in DCI format with a 17:9 aspect, for a high-quality cinematic look.
Fujifilm’s unrivalled color science benefits video, too. When creating movies, you can use any of X-T30 II’s 18 different Film Simulations to add your own distinctive look to footage, including ETERNA/CINEMA, the motion picture film stock used in many cinematic masterpieces.

Full HD 240p High Speed Footage

X-T30 II records Full HD high-speed movies at 240fps. Played back at normal speed, this results in smooth, high-quality footage with up to a 10x slow-motion effect.

F-Log

For greater post-production flexibility, X-T30 II supports F-Log video format, which allows you to record movies with a wide dynamic range, improving detail in highlights and shadows. Using F-Log View Assist while recording also gives you a BT.709 equivalent preview on the LCD monitor, to help with visualizing what an edit could look like.

Shooting Modes to Suit Any Conditions

X-T30 II adapts to the way you want to create images. For great results with minimal hassle, AUTO offers intelligent, fully-automatic shooting. Choose Manual to take full control yourself; pick Aperture Priority for front to back sharpness, or blur backgrounds in your image; switch to Shutter Priority to emphasize movement in your subject; or set Program to leave the choice of aperture and shutter speed to the camera.
Using the latest technology, image quality in X-T30 II’s AUTO/SP mode has been taken to a new level. Landscapes are clearer and more vivid, portraits are more beautifully natural, and backlit scenes are less prone to losing details in highlights and shadows, giving stellar results straight out of the camera.

Control Mode

With its intuitive operation, X-T30 II lets you quickly switch between exposure modes, simply by setting a combination of the Shutter Speed Dial and the Aperture Ring on the lens. The Exposure Compensation Dial also allows you to adjust exposure by up to ±5 stops*.
* When using the dial at C position

AUTO Mode

X-T30 II’s enhanced AUTO mode uses the latest technology to deliver ultimate image quality. Landscapes are clearer and more vivid, portraits are beautifully natural, and backlit scenes are less prone to losing detail in highlights and shadows, giving stellar results straight out of the camera.

High-Speed Continuous Framing

Need to tackle fast-moving subjects? X-T30 II has your back. Between its 8 frames-per-second mechanical shutter, and 20 frames-per-second Electronic Shutter, keeping up with the action is well within your grasp. And if you need even more speed, the Electronic Shutter can be accelerated to 30 frames-per-second, with a slight crop to the view.

Smartphone Compatibility

Install the free FUJIFILM Camera Remote App on your smartphone or tablet, and you’ll be able to send images from the camera to smart devices, control exposure settings, and remotely release the shutter. The app can also help save data by compressing images down to 3MB as they’re transferred. Pairing your camera via Bluetooth allows you to schedule image transfers from the camera to your device while it is not being used. You can also enable notifications for firmware updates, then download and install them remotely, without the need for a computer.

Model Name FUJIFILM X-T30 II
Declaration of conformity View PDF

The Fujifilm XT30 II and XT3 WW are Big, Giant Slaps

For more stories like this, please subscribe to the Phoblographer.

Let’s be clear. I understand why camera manufacturers would want to revamp certain cameras. Sony has done it with the a7r series where you can get a new LCD screen. Today, Fujifilm is announcing two small revamps. There’s the XT3 World Wide and the Fujifilm X-T30 II. I’ve got mixed feelings about the cameras in one way. And in another way, I feel really slapped in the face as a decade-long Fujifilm customer.

What You Should Know about the XT3 WW and the Fujifilm X-T30 II

First off, the Fujifilm XT3 WW (World Wide) is something that could annoy a lot of photographers. It’s basically the camera without the charger. That means that you’ll need to charge it via USB-C. Personally, I’m alright with that. Lots of devices use USB-C and I already own a charger from the four Fujifilm cameras I’ve bought over the past decade. So if I want to charge my X Pro 3 and X Pro 1 at the same time, at least one battery will be in a charger. This also lets them get cameras out to the entire world and cuts down on logistics issues.

That’s fine. I can live with that.

But the Fujifilm X-T30 II is a particularly odd one. They’re removing the charger. They’re also giving it a new LCD screen and updating the firmware to have the autofocus to Fujifilm XT4 level. This one is the one that’s angering me a bit.

But Why?

As a long time X Pro series camera owner, this is annoying me. I’ve written often about the Fujifilm X Pro 3. Fujifilm has stated that not much support comes for it because it doesn’t sell well. But in reality, I feel they just didn’t support the camera well enough.  

So why couldn’t the X Pro 3 get some sort of update? Where is the Fujifilm X Pro 3 II? Are they saving it for the 10-year anniversary of X-series next year? And if so, will it come with even bigger features?

Fujifilm tells us that sometimes a camera can’t get a firmware update because there isn’t enough memory on the camera. Why can’t the X Pro 3 get a second version with more memory? And more importantly, why can’t the X Pro 3 get the XT4’s autofocus performance? 

It may annoys others even more that the camera didn’t get other film simulations like the Bleach Bypass or Nostalgic Negative simulations. Seriously, how do they just stop giving major support to a camera after around a year or so? 

To make this not look like just a rant, I’m also thankful to Fujifilm. I’m thankful to them for creating retro-styled cameras with great ergonomics. I’m thankful to Fujifilm for creating a space where we don’t need to sit in front of a computer for hours. I’m thankful as a publisher and Editor in Chief for previous advertising as well. It helped me pay the staff and keep the lights on. And I’m also very thankful for the years of constant firmware updates. They truly changed the industry in this way. But how does a company go from doing that for a decade to then neglecting a core customer base? 

I’m really annoyed that Fujifilm won’t do this with the X Pro 3. Why and how can a camera we reviewed in 2019 get a major boost and update? The X Pro 3 was also announced in 2019, and that’s when we reviewed it too! But even so, a newer camera is still being neglected.

FUJIFILM X-T30 II | Cameras

Inspired by photographers

Every element of the FUJIFILM X-T30 II is designed specifically for photographers. From disc control, a compact and lightweight body to the latest generation of APS-C sensors, it excites the imagination and inspires creativity. The X-T30 II combines state-of-the-art user-friendly features (touchscreen display and quality built-in flash) with vintage charm, allowing you to fully focus on the action.

X-Trans CMOS 4 sensor

The X-T30 II is equipped with the fourth generation X-Trans CMOS 4 sensor. The 26.1MP backlit sensor minimizes noise and increases sensitivity up to ISO160. In addition, the unique X-Trans color filter design with irregular pattern reduces moiré and color distortion without the use of an optical low-pass filter.

X-Processor 4

The X-Processor 4 quad-core processor and X-Trans CMOS 4 sensor provide powerful image processing capabilities and support a variety of film simulation modes for a high level of creativity with color and tone processing. The motion tracking function has been significantly improved, and autofocus has been optimized for photography and 4K/30P video shooting.

Superb color reproduction

Your shooting style

Color reproduction is essential to photography, and Fujifilm’s 85 years of color science experience is evident in every shot taken with our technology. Each Film Simulation mode features carefully chosen depth, saturation, and tonality settings to minimize or eliminate the need for post-processing.

Film Simulation Modes

Photographers and videographers can get creative with the unique options of 18 different Film Simulation modes available on the X-T30 II. Each Film Simulation mode is specifically designed to reproduce the colors and tones of Fujifilm’s most popular analog films, as well as the effects of film post-processing. By selecting your favorite Film Simulation mode, you can create images or videos with the appropriate image quality, transfer them directly from the camera to your smartphone or computer, and publish directly to social networks or blogs as soon as they are created.

Adjustable settings

With the X-T30 II, you can easily create your own visual style using film simulation modes with other expressive effects. These include film grain texture, color depth, clarity, sharpness, and tones in highlights and shadows. All these settings are displayed in real time in the electronic viewfinder and LCD touch screen. This allows you to create great effects and save them as presets.

Best in class

Autofocus

The X-T30 II’s advanced autofocus uses densely spaced phase detection points and advanced algorithms for superior results. The unrivaled speed of the X-T30 II and sensors throughout the sensor ensure you have the right tool for any shoot.

Movie Features

Most modern cameras can record 4K video, but the X-T30 II supports upsampling from 6K. In this way, you can shoot in high definition with relatively low noise and excellent clarity. Your video will look professional with DCI 17:9 aspect ratio support.
Fujifilm’s unique color expertise is also useful for video shooting. Use any of the X-T30 II’s 18 Film Simulation modes to create your own unique video style. These include the ETERNA film simulation mode, which has been used in the creation of many cinematic masterpieces.

Full HD 240p high-speed recording

The X-T30 II supports Full HD high-speed recording at 240 frames per second. When playing at normal speed, you get a smooth high-quality picture with a slow-motion effect up to 10 times.

F-Log

The X-T30 II supports the F-Log format, which allows you to record with a wide dynamic range and enhance detail in highlights and shadows. F-Log View Assist mode provides the equivalent of a BT.709 preview on the LCD monitor when shooting, so you can instantly see the result of the final processing.

Shooting modes for a variety of conditions

The X-T30 II adapts to your way of working. AUTO mode provides easy, fully automated shooting for maximum results with minimum effort. With manual mode, you can take control. Choose aperture priority to sharpen or blur the background of an image, set shutter speed priority to capture moving subjects, or set exposure program to let the camera choose aperture settings and shutter speeds.
Using the latest technology, the X-T30 II’s AUTO/SP image quality has been taken to a new level. Landscapes are sharper and more vibrant, portraits are more natural looking, and backlit scenes are less prone to losing highlights and shadows, resulting in great results immediately after shooting.

Control Mode

The X-T30 II’s intuitive camera controls let you quickly switch between exposure modes. This can be done by choosing a combination of shutter speed dial and aperture ring positions. The exposure compensation dial allows you to adjust the exposure in a range of ±5 steps*.
* When the dial is in position C

AUTO mode

The X-T30 II’s enhanced AUTO mode delivers superior image quality with the latest technology. Landscapes are sharper and more vivid, portraits are more natural looking, and backlit scenes are less prone to losing highlights and shadows, resulting in great results immediately after shooting.

High speed continuous shooting

Need to capture a fast moving subject? The X-T30 II takes care of everything. A mechanical shutter capable of shooting at up to 8 fps, as well as an electronic shutter of up to 20 fps, let you catch the most rapid changes. If the speed is still not enough, the electronic shutter speed can be increased to 30 frames per second with a slight reduction in view.

Smartphone compatibility

Install the free FUJIFILM Camera Remote app on your smartphone or tablet to directly send camera files to mobile devices, control exposure settings, and remotely release the shutter. The application is also suitable for data storage. It provides compression of images up to 3 MB during their transmission. A Bluetooth connection allows you to schedule file transfers from your camera to your mobile device while you’re not using it. You can also set up camera software update notifications, download and install them remotely without a computer.

Model name FUJIFILM X-T30 II
Declaration of Conformity View PDF

Fujifilm X-T3 vs Fujifilm X-T30: What is the difference?

smartphonesvideo cardswireless headphonesprocessors

73 points

Fujifilm X-T3

70 points

Fujifilm X-T30

1. 799

2.299

Comparison winner

1,799

+ XF 18-55mm f/2.8-4 R LM OIS

€ 9 0119 2.299

vs

125 facts in comparison

Fujifilm X-T3

Fujifilm X-T30

Why is Fujifilm X-T3 better than Fujifilm X-T30?

  • All weather (splash proof)?
  • 2x better video recording quality (main camera)?
    2160 x 60fps vs 2160 x 30fps
  • 50% faster maximum shutter speed?
    1/8000s vs 1/4000s
  • Has two card slots?
  • Has a 3.5 mm mini-jack socket?
  • 200Mbps higher video bitrate?
    400Mbps vs 200Mbps
  • 10°C lower potential operating temperature?
    -10°C vs 0°C

Why is Fujifilm X-T30 better than Fujifilm X-T3?

  • 156g lighter?
    383g vs 539g
  • Has flash?
  • 36. 54% less case volume?
    458.8cm³ vs 723cm³
  • Has a tilted viewfinder?
  • 14.1mm narrower?
    118.4mm vs 132.5mm
  • 10mm lower?
    82.8mm vs 92.8mm
  • 12mm thinner? Fujifilm X-T3

    9
    46.8mm vs 58.8mm

  • 901

    5 vs

    Fujifilm X-S10

    Fujifilm X-T30

    vs

    Fujifilm X100V

    Fujifilm X-T3

    vs

    9000 5 Fujifilm X-h2

    Fujifilm X-T30

    vs

    Fujifilm X- Fujifilm X-T30

    vs

    Fujifilm X-T30 II

    Fujifilm m X-T3

    vs

    Fujifilm X-T30 II

    Fujifilm X-T30

    vs

    Fujifilm X-E4

    Fujifilm X-T3

    vs

    Fujifilm X-T2 film X-T20

    Fujifilm X-T3

    vs

    Fujifilm Fujifilm X-T4

    Fujifilm X-T3

    vs

    vs

    Sony A6400

    Fujifilm X -T30

    vs

    Sony A6400

    Fujifilm X-T3

    vs

    Fujifilm X-T200

    Fujifilm X-T200

    Fujifilm X-T3

    vs

    Fujifilm X100V 900 06

    Fujifilm X-T30

    vs

    Fujifilm X-T2

    Price comparison

    Fujifilm X-T3

    Buy used:

    €770

    Rent from:

    €30

    Product 90 092

    Shop Price
    Fujifilm X-T5 Gehäuse schwarz €1,799 -55m. ..Fujifilm X-T5 black + FUJINON XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS Objektiv Kit €2,299
    Fujifilm X-T5 Silber + FUJINON XF16-80mm…Fujifilm X-T5 Silber + FUJINON XF16-80mmF4 R OIS WR Objektiv Kit, 4547410486544 9Fujifilm X-T3 16588561 26.1 Mio. Pixel D…Fujifilm X-T3 16588561 26.1 Mio. Pixel Digital Spiegellose Kameragehäuse -… €775
    üsse 18113 Gebraucht (D408) €1,324
    Fujifilm X-T3 – Spiegellose Systemcamera…Fujifilm X-T3 – Spiegellose Systemcamera – 26MP (schwarz) €770
    Fujifilm X-T3 + TOP (253733)

    Fujifilm X-T3 black Body
    Fujifilm X-T3 black Body €1,299

    Fujifilm X-T30

    90 093 €2,369

    9009 0

    Product Shop price €2,299
    Fujifilm X-T5 Silber + FUJINON XF16-80mm. ..Fujifilm X-T5 Silber + FUJINON XF16-80mmF4 R OIS WR Objektiv Kit, 4547410486544
    FUJIFILM X-h3 €2,130
    FUJIFILM X-T5 schwarz + FUJINON XF16-80m…FUJIFILM X-T5 schwarz + FUJINON XF16-80mmF4 R OIS WR Objektiv Kit €2 .368
    Fujifilm X-T30 II black Body €949
    Fujifilm X-T30 II black Body €949
    Fujifilm X-T30 II black Body €949
    Fujifilm X-T30 II black Body €949

    User reviews

    2 User reviews

    Fujifilm X-T3

    8.5 / 10

    2 User reviews

    Fujifilm X-T30

    2 User reviews

    Functions

    Build Quality

    9.5 /10

    2 votes

    9. 0 /10

    2 votes

    10.0 /10

    2 votes

    Controls

    7.5 /10

    2 votes

    7.5 /10

    2 votes

    90 005 Low light operation

    7.5 /10

    2 votes

    7.5 /10

    2 votes

    Autofocus

    6.5 /10

    2 votes 900 06

    8.0 /10

    2 votes

    Optics

    sensor size

    One of The most important aspect of a camera is the size of its sensor. A larger sensor captures more light, which improves low-light image quality, dynamic range, and overall image quality.

    lens mount

    Fujifilm X

    Fujifilm X

    focus points

    The more focus points, the more flexibility in choosing which part of the scene to focus on. They also give the sensor more power to determine the best part to focus on in more automatic modes.

    megapixels (main camera)

    26.1MP

    26.1MP

    The number of megapixels determines the resolution of images captured by the main camera. A higher megapixel count means the camera is capable of capturing more detail. However, the number of megapixels is not the only important element that determines image quality.

    maximum light sensitivity

    12800 ISO

    12800 ISO

    Higher light sensitivity (ISO level) allows the sensor to absorb more light. This can be used to shoot moving subjects at high shutter speeds, or to take pictures in poor lighting conditions without using the flash.

    maximum extended ISO range

    51200ISO

    51200ISO

    Extended ISO range allows you to go beyond native ISO. This is achieved by digitally enhancing the image output. The resulting image will be of lower quality than when saved within the native ISO range, but this may come in handy in certain situations.

    has sensor shift stabilization

    ✖Fujifilm X-T3

    ✖Fujifilm X-T30

    With sensor shift, the sensor itself (not the lens) moves itself so that it can cancel out any camera vibration. This means that the image will be stabilized no matter which lens is used.

    High-resolution continuous shooting

    High-speed continuous shooting is useful when shooting moving subjects.

    has AF tracking

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Tracking AF will allow you to correctly focus on the subject, press the shutter button, if the subject moves, AF will follow it. Subjects will always be in focus.

    Video recording

    video recording (main camera)

    2160 x 60fps

    2160 x 30fps

    The maximum resolution possible for videos taken with the main camera. You can also select other frame rates, these videos usually have lower resolutions.

    has phase detection autofocus in movie mode

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Phase detection AF system is faster than contrast AF system. Even when recording scenes with a lot of fast movement, videos are crisp and clear.

    has continuous autofocus when recording movies

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Subjects always remain in focus when recording movies.

    has a microphone connector

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    The microphone connector allows you to connect an external high-quality or specialized microphone.

    has a 3.5mm mini jack jack

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✖Fujifilm X-T30

    You can use a standard mini jack to connect most headphones.

    has a stereo microphone

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Stereo microphone allows you to record audio or video in stereo without an external microphone.

    Includes time lapse function

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Time lapse shows the long passage of time in acceleration. A series of photos taken from the same position over a long period is combined to create a short video. This is a great way to capture moments like sunset or clouds moving across the sky.

    movie bitrate

    400Mbps

    200Mbps

    The higher the video bitrate, the better the movie quality with sharper details, as well as significantly less image distortion from compression.

    number of microphones

    The more microphones a device has, the better it filters out background noise and improves the overall sound quality.

    Battery

    Battery life (CIPA)

    390shots

    380shots

    CIPA is an independent, standard measurement that determines how many shots a camera can take before the battery dies.

    has replaceable battery

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    User can replace battery in case of failure

    has battery

    ✔Fujifil m X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Device battery can be charged and used again.

    has a battery level indicator

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    The indicator shows that the battery level is low.

    battery capacity

    Unknown. Help us offer a price. (Fujifilm X-T3)

    1260mAh

    Battery charge, or battery capacity, is the amount of electrical energy stored in the battery. The higher the battery charge, the longer the battery life.

    Functions

    has Wi-Fi

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    The device can connect to Wi-Fi.

    Yes Bluetooth

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Bluetooth is a wireless technology that allows you to easily transfer data between devices: smartphones, tablets and computers.

    Has two card slots

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✖Fujifilm X-T30

    Has two memory card slots, allowing you to store more photos without changing cards. This is especially useful for long shoots when you need more space.

    Pixel shift shooting available

    ✖Fujifilm X-T3

    ✖Fujifilm X-T30

    The camera can take a series of shots by shifting the sensor slightly with each shot. The shots can then be combined to create a very high resolution image. This is very useful when creating photographs as works of art.

    shoots in RAW format

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    RAW image file contains minimally processed sensor data. RAW files are so named because they have not yet been processed and are therefore not ready to be printed or edited with a bitmap graphics editor.

    supports lossless compressed raw

    ✖Fujifilm X-T3

    ✖Fujifilm X-T30

    The camera can capture images in lossless compressed raw format. This gives you all the benefits of shooting in raw format, but takes up much less storage space. The smaller file size also provides faster read/write speeds.

    Wi-Fi version

    Wi-Fi 4 (802.11n)

    Wi-Fi 4 (802.11n)

    Wi-Fi versions supported by the device.

    smartphone – remote control

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Allows you to use your smartphone as a remote control.

    has HDMI output

    ✔Fujifilm X-T3

    ✔Fujifilm X-T30

    Devices with HDMI or mini HDMI ports can stream HD video and audio to the connected display.

    Price comparison

    Fujifilm X-T3

    Buy used:

    €770

    Rent from:

    €30

    Fujifilm X-T5 schwarz + FUJINON XF18-55m. ..Fujifilm X-T5 schwarz + FUJINON XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS Objektiv Kit

    900 93

    9 0095

    Product Shop Price
    Fujifilm X-T5 Gehäuse schwarz €1,799
    €2,299
    FUJIFILM X-h3 €2,130
    Fujifilm X-T5 Silber + FUJINON XF16-80mm…Fujifilm X-T5 Silber + FUJINON XF16-80mmF4 R OIS WR Objekt iv Kit, 4547410486544 €2,369
    Fujifilm X-T3 16588561 26.1 Mio. Pixel D…Fujifilm X-T3 16588561 26.1 Mio. Pixel Digital Spiegellose Kameragehäuse -… €775
    üsse 18113 Gebraucht (D408) €1.324
    Fujifilm X-T3 – Spiegellose Systemcamera…Fujifilm X-T3 – Spiegellose Systemcamera – 26MP (schwarz) €770
    Fujifilm X-T3 + TOP (253733) €969
    Fujifilm X-T3 black Body €1,299
    Fujifilm X-T3 black Body €1.

    Bose portable soundlink: Portable Bluetooth Speakers | Bose

    Опубликовано: April 15, 2023 в 4:36 pm

    Автор:

    Категории: Miscellaneous

    Bose Portable Smart Speaker | Bose

    What are the main benefits of the Bose Portable Smart Speaker?

    The Bose Portable Smart Speaker is an incredible-sounding smart speaker that’s flexible enough to handle any situation. It produces surprisingly spacious audio, including deep, rich bass, that spreads evenly in all directions so it envelops you from every angle. It’s battery-powered, so you can easily bring it with you all around your home and ask Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa for music. And away from Wi-Fi®, it’s still an excellent Bluetooth® speaker — so your sound can go wherever you go. Plus, you can control it with the Bose Music app, Apple AirPlay 2, or Spotify® Connect, or with the intuitive buttons on the speaker. And you can group it with other Bose smart speakers and soundbars to fill your home with sound — or even send synchronized audio to a Bose Bluetooth speaker or pair of headphones.

    How does the Bose Portable Smart Speaker compare to the Bose Smart Speaker 500 and Bose Home Speaker 300?

    The Bose Portable Smart Speaker is our only portable smart speaker, while the Bose Home Speaker 300 and Smart Speaker 500 have no battery and must be plugged into the wall to function. Acoustically, the Portable Smart Speaker and the Home Speaker 300 have comparable performance, with the same 360-degree sound and impressively rich bass from similarly compact sizes. Meanwhile, the larger Bose Smart Speaker 500 is our best-sounding smart speaker, providing wall-to-wall stereo sound from a single enclosure. The Smart Speaker 500 also includes a display screen to show you what’s playing. Finally, the Portable Smart Speaker is water resistant and does not have an AUX input, while the Home Speaker 300 and Smart Speaker 500 are not water-resistant and do include AUX.

    All three speakers share the same voice, app, and software features, including your choice of Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa, compatibility with the Bose Music app, Apple AirPlay 2, Bluetooth, the ability to synchronize in multi-room groups, and more.

    How does the Bose Portable Smart Speaker compare to the Bose SoundLink Revolve+ II?

    The Bose Portable Smart Speaker has noticeably more powerful acoustic performance than the SoundLink Revolve+ II and is a bit larger, with a different visual design. Both products work as a Bluetooth speaker in any environment, but when you bring the Portable Smart Speaker onto a Wi-Fi network, it also works as a smart speaker with Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa — plus all the other features of a Bose smart speaker (Bose Music app compatibility, synchronizing multiple speakers, AirPlay 2, and more). The SoundLink Revolve+ II does not have any built-in voice assistants, smart features, or Wi-Fi access. Finally, the SoundLink Revolve+ II has a battery life up to 17 hours, while the extra acoustic power and voice assistant functionality of the Portable Smart Speaker limit its battery life up to 12 hours at loud volumes.

    What should I do if the Bose Music app doesn’t find my Portable Smart Speaker during setup?

    First check if your speaker is in Setup Mode: the upper and lower portions of the light ring should be glowing an amber color. If this is not the case, please follow these three simple steps to make sure your speaker is in Setup Mode:

    1. Connect the speaker to a power outlet using the USB-C cable and power supply
    2. Turn the speaker on by pressing the power button
    3. Simultaneously press and hold the volume down and the play/pause buttons for six seconds. While you’re doing this, the sides of the light ring should glow white and increase in size

    From which sources can I play music?

    The Bose Portable Smart Speaker can play music directly from streaming music services over Wi-Fi, controlled either by Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa (where available), or using the Bose Music app. The Bose Portable Smart Speaker also has Bluetooth capability. Additionally, you can play music on the Bose Portable Smart Speaker from the Spotify app on a smartphone, tablet, or computer using Spotify Connect, and from an Apple device via Apple AirPlay 2 compatibility for streaming content like Apple Music.

    Can I use the Bose Portable Smart Speaker without Wi-Fi?

    Yes. When no Wi-Fi is available, you can use the Portable Smart Speaker as a powerful Bluetooth speaker by connecting to it through your mobile device’s Bluetooth settings. Wi-Fi is required for smart features such as voice control through Google Assistant or Alexa, Apple AirPlay 2, Bose Music app control and content browsing, multi-speaker grouping, and more.

    What happens when I bring the speaker away from a Wi-Fi network while it’s playing?

    If you start music on the Bose Portable Smart Speaker through Wi-Fi (using a voice assistant or the Bose Music app, for example) and then you carry the product away from your Wi-Fi network, at some point the speaker will lose its Wi-Fi signal and the music will stop. At that point, if you want to keep playing, just press the Bluetooth button on the speaker to connect to your mobile device and play content from there. If you start playback over Bluetooth away from Wi-Fi and then bring the speaker home to a Wi-Fi network, it will reconnect to Wi-Fi in the background without interrupting your music.

    How long will the battery last?

    Battery life depends on what type of music you’re playing and at what volume, but the battery of the Portable Smart Speaker will last up to 12 hours while playing at a loud volume. It will last over 24 hours in standby mode, listening for voice commands. And if you turn it all the way off for storage, travel, or battery savings, it will last a month or more.

    How long does it take for the battery to charge fully?

    4 hours, as long as you are using the Bose-provided power cable attached to the speaker or to the Bose Portable Smart Speaker Charging Cradle (available as an accessory). Using a third-party USB-C cable or power source may increase charging time.

    How do I turn off the microphones on the speaker?

    The microphones on the Bose Portable Smart Speaker may be turned off with a single press of the microphone-off button on the top of the speaker (on the left side). This button completely cuts power to the microphones, so the speaker will not hear any commands. For security reasons, it is not possible to use a voice command or the Bose Music app to turn the microphones on or off — only a physical button press can control the microphones. When the microphones are off, the red light beside the button will always be lit up. Simply press the microphone button again if you want to turn the microphones back on.

    Can I still play music on the speaker when the microphones are turned off?

    Yes. Although the Bose Portable Smart Speaker has Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa built in, you can also play music from other sources, such as integrated Wi-Fi music services available through the Bose Music app. You can also use a Bluetooth connection, Spotify Connect, or Apple AirPlay 2. All these non-voice sources are available independent of whether the microphones are turned off or whether Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa are enabled.

    Does Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa work when the speaker is not plugged into power?

    Yes. As long as you have set up your assistant and are within range of a Wi-Fi network your speaker knows, your voice assistant will be connected, and your speaker will listen for your command — even if it’s on battery power. That means you can use the Portable Smart Speaker as a voice-controlled smart speaker all around the home — ask it for music in the kitchen, on the patio, or even yell to it from the shower.

    Can I make or take calls from the Bose Portable Smart Speaker?

    Yes. Using Alexa only, you can directly call Bose smart products, Amazon Echo products, and anyone in your contacts list. Simply say, “Alexa, call Mom,” to initiate a call. Or say “Alexa, answer,” to accept an incoming call. You do not need your phone to make or take a call, and it’s free of charge. However, when calling products, both parties are required to have this feature set up in order to use and be on Wi-Fi.

    Currently, Amazon Alexa works with QC35 headphones II, QC35 II Gaming Headset, Headphones 700, Home Speaker 300, Smart Speaker 500, Portable Smart Speaker, Smart Soundbar 300, Soundbar 500, and Smart Soundbar 700.

    Can I use the Bose Portable Smart Speaker as a clock or alarm?

    Yes. Although the Bose Portable Smart Speaker does not have a display to show the time visually, you can use Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa (where available) to ask for the time, timers, and alarms.

    Does the Bose Portable Smart Speaker have Wi-Fi built in?

    Yes. The speaker uses the 802.11ac Wi-Fi standard.

    Does the Bose Portable Smart Speaker have Bluetooth built in?

    Yes. Bluetooth makes it easy for anyone to connect a smartphone or other device to the Bose Portable Smart Speaker in a familiar way, and allows you the flexibility to play audio from any source, like a YouTube video or a recording saved on a phone or laptop.

    Does the Bose Portable Smart Speaker have an auxiliary line-in jack or the ability to play auxiliary through its USB-C port?

    No.

    Can I charge the speaker and play audio at the same time?

    Yes.

    Does the Bose Portable Smart Speaker include or work with a remote control?

    No. You can control the product from across the room using voice control through Google Assistant or Alexa (where available), or from anywhere on your Wi-Fi network using the Bose Music app or Apple AirPlay 2, or from remote locations using Spotify Connect.

    Is the Bose Portable Smart Speaker water resistant?

    Yes. The Portable Smart Speaker is IPx4 water resistant, so you can get it wet with splashes and sprays. While the speaker should not be submerged under water, it can easily withstand sprays from sitting next to the sink, the pool, or the shower.

    Can the product connect to more than one Bluetooth device at a time?

    No. Only one mobile device can be connected to the Bose Portable Smart Speaker at a time via Bluetooth. However, it’s easy to switch between devices using the Bose Music app or the Bluetooth settings on the selected device.

    What is the acoustic technology in the Bose Portable Smart Speaker?

    The Bose Portable Smart Speaker applies unique Bose portable speaker acoustic technology in a new, more powerful form factor. An ultra-efficient, high-excursion transducer aims downward into an acoustic deflector to radiate rich sound uniformly in every direction, while three passive radiators deepen the bass by increasing the vibrating surface area of the speaker. Just like with our SoundLink Revolve and Revolve+ portable speakers, this 360-degree design avoids the positional sweet spots and frequency drop-offs of speakers that just aim forward — but this time, with the extra power and stronger bass that comes with a new shape and a third passive radiator. Placed in the middle of the room, a corner, or anywhere in between, the Bose Portable Smart Speaker delivers the same impressive audio experience for everyone. Music is clear, surprisingly spacious, and remarkably loud for a product of this size.

    Can I control the bass and treble?

    Yes. Bass and treble can be adjusted via the settings menu in the Bose Music app.

    Can the Bose Portable Smart Speaker work in multi-room groups with other Bose products like speakers or headphones?

    Yes. The Bose Portable Smart Speaker can play in synchronized multi-room groups with additional Bose Portable Smart Speaker units, or with the Bose Smart Speaker 500, the Bose Home Speaker 300, the Bose Soundbar 500, or the Bose Smart Soundbar 700.  And coming soon, you can also send synchronized audio from the Bose Portable Smart Speaker to one additional Bose Bluetooth product, such as a portable speaker or pair of headphones. However, you cannot play synchronized multi-room content across the Bose Portable Smart Speaker and either Bose SoundTouch products or products from other manufacturers (including Google or Amazon).

    SoundLink Flex Bluetooth Speaker | Bose

    What is the range of the SoundLink Flex speaker’s Bluetooth performance?

    The SoundLink Flex’s Bluetooth connection is capable of stable operation of at least 30 ft (9 m). Performance can be affected by obstacles such as walls or metal, interference from Wi-Fi or other wireless devices, and device manufacturers’ Bluetooth implementations. SoundLink Flex uses the same Bluetooth 4.2 chip that Bose has used in many other speakers, building on our years of interoperability experience and rigorous testing to offer a strong and highly reliable connectivity experience.

    How many devices can pair with the SoundLink Flex speaker at once? What happens if I have several Bluetooth-enabled devices in my house?

    The SoundLink Flex keeps track of the last 8 devices to have paired and connected with it, dropping the least recently used when a new one is paired. When in Bluetooth mode, the SoundLink Flex searches for and connects to the two most recently connected active Bluetooth-enabled devices. The speaker only receives audio from one device at a time. When the first device stops playing, the other can start.

    What is the purpose of the multi-function button?

    When in audio playback mode, the multi-function button allows for play (single press), pause (single press), track forward (double press), and track backwards (triple press). Pressing and holding the multi-function button will activate the voice control capabilities of your device. Pressing the multi-function again will exit the voice control mode.

    When there is an incoming call, pressing the multi-function button will answer the call and pressing and holding it will reject the call. During an active call, pressing the multi-function button will end the call.

    What is the purpose of the built-in microphone on the SoundLink Flex speaker?

    The microphone in the speaker acts as an extension of the microphone in your smartphone. It’s activated when you make or take a call and when you use the multi-function button to access the voice control capabilities on your device to ask Siri or Google Assistant to play music, tell you the weather, give you the score of a game, and other common tasks.

    Does the SoundLink Flex speaker feature a speakerphone?

    Yes. The SoundLink Flex can be used for both outloud listening and hands-free communication, perfect for phone calls or even group meetings while working from home.

    What happens when my phone is streaming music to the SoundLink Flex speaker and a call comes in?

    When a call comes in, the audio on the SoundLink Flex will pause, and the call will ring through the speaker. If you wish to answer the call through the SoundLink Flex, simply press the multi-function button to answer the call. You can now talk into the speaker itself to conduct your phone call. Once you end your call, music playback will resume. Some details of this experience will vary depending on the implementation by the phone manufacturer.

    What is Party Mode and how does it work?

    Party Mode lets you connect two Bose Bluetooth speakers to play audio in perfect sync. This feature requires any two Bose Bluetooth speakers from the following list: SoundLink Flex, SoundLink Micro, SoundLink Color II, SoundLink Revolve (series I & II) and SoundLink Revolve+ (series I & II). The primary method of entering this mode is through the Bose Connect app.

    If you did not yet download the Bose Connect app, you can still enable Party Mode by pressing and holding the Bluetooth and volume up buttons until you hear “Press the Bluetooth and volume down buttons simultaneously on a second Bose device.”

    On the other speaker, press and hold the Bluetooth button and volume down simultaneously and release the buttons when the speaker emits a tone.

    After 10 seconds, you hear “Party Mode” from both speakers simultaneously. Party Mode is enabled. You are now able to play audio in unison using your device.

    What is Stereo Mode and how does it work?

    Stereo Mode, as the name suggests, enables a stereo audio experience via two Bose Bluetooth speakers from the following list: SoundLink Flex, SoundLink Micro, SoundLink Color II, SoundLink Revolve (II) and SoundLink Revolve+ (II). The primary method of entering this mode is through the Bose Connect app.

    If you did not yet download the Bose Connect app, you can still enable this mode by first configuring Party Mode as described above. Then, toggle to Stereo Mode by pressing and holding the Bluetooth button and volume up until you hear “Stereo Mode.”

    Pressing Bluetooth and volume up again will toggle back to Party Mode.

    What technologies are used in the SoundLink Flex speaker?

    SoundLink Flex features one custom-designed transducer and two small passive radiators (one front and one rear facing) to deliver the clearest possible sound and strong, deep bass for a product of its size. The speaker also features PositionIQ™ technology, which automatically detects its orientation and optimizes the EQ to ensure natural, lifelike sound no matter the orientation. Together, these technologies enable the SoundLink Flex to deliver an exceptional music experience with remarkable simplicity.

    What is PositionIQ?

    Using a built in sensor, SoundLink Flex detects its orientation and automatically adjusts its EQ to deliver an uncompromised, high-fidelity audio experience whether it’s vertical, lying flat, or horizontal. SoundLink Flex is the only Bose product to feature this proprietary technology.

    Does the SoundLink Flex speaker support Wi-Fi or WiDi®?

    No. The SoundLink Flex’s wireless connection is Bluetooth only.

    The SoundLink Flex speaker is waterproof and dustproof. It’s IP67-rated. What does that mean for how I can use it?

    With SoundLink Flex, we’ve stretched beyond the required testing parameters — in this case an IP67-rated product — to ensure that your speaker will long outlast an accidental drop into water or getting exposed to a dust storm. The SoundLink Flex is completely dust-tight, can withstand water splashes as well as the pressure of being immersed in water up to 3.3 ft. (1 m) deep, for up to 30 minutes. To ensure further protection from water, dust, and debris, the transducer and passive radiators underneath the steel grille are built with rugged, waterproof materials.

    Will the SoundLink Flex speaker float?

    Yes. The SoundLink Flex will float.

    How do I best clean the SoundLink Flex speaker?

    The SoundLink Flex is rugged and sturdy enough to take everywhere. If it gets dirty, you can simply clean it off using (lukewarm) tap water and a microfiber cloth. Also make sure to rinse it with fresh water if it’s exposed to salt or chlorinated water. Don’t use a cleaning detergent or alcohol. Ensure the charging port is clean and dry before you connect it to power.

    Is the SoundLink Flex speaker’s utility loop user-replaceable?

    No. While the loop is designed to provide many years of service without noticeable degradation in performance, if it does break, the unit must be sent back and the loop repaired/replaced by Bose.

    What is the battery performance of the SoundLink Flex speaker?

    In a typical usage, the SoundLink Flex battery lasts up to 12 hours. As with any battery-operated device, battery performance can vary based on a number of different factors. These include the type of content being played, the volume at which it’s played, and the surrounding temperature. SoundLink Flex was rigorously tested and verified to provide up to 12 hours of battery life based on playing music at typical indoor temperatures from Spotify’s Global Top 50 at 65% volume, which represents a comfortable volume while listening indoors. Under these typical use conditions, SoundLink Flex offers approximately 12 hours of playtime, or about 17 hours of podcasts or voice calls. Listening to music at less than 50% volume ensures a longer battery life, whereas increasing the volume past 65% of max decreases the life of the battery at a faster rate.

    What are the charging options available for the SoundLink Flex speaker?

    Because SoundLink Flex employs a standard USB-C charging interface, it can receive power from nearly any USB power source. For best results, use the included USB-C to USB-A cable with a USB power source rated for at least 1.5 amps (not included). Please note that some power sources with less than 1 amp of current may charge SoundLink Flex more slowly than the recommended power sources, and may not be able to keep up with the power consumed while the speaker is operating.

    How long does it take to charge the SoundLink Flex speaker’s battery?

    While not playing music, much of the SoundLink Flex’s battery charge can be recovered in approximately 4 hours when using a USB power source. With a stronger power source (1.5 amp), charging time may be closer to 3 hours. Charging from alternate USB power sources or when playing music may take longer.

    Can I connect my phone to SoundLink Flex without the Bose Connect app?

    Yes. You can manually pair your mobile device to a SoundLink Flex speaker without using the Bose Connect app. First, enable Bluetooth in your phone’s settings. Power on the SoundLink Flex and press and hold the Bluetooth button. You will hear, “Ready to connect,” and the speaker’s Bluetooth light will blink blue. In your phone’s settings, choose “Bose Flex SoundLink” from the list of devices. You will hear “Connected to <mobile device name>” and the speaker’s Bluetooth light will become solid white, indicating that your mobile device and speaker are connected.

    Can I pair my SoundLink Flex with another Bose Bluetooth speaker without the Bose Connect app?

    Yes. You can pair a Bose SoundLink Flex with another Bose Bluetooth speaker without using the Bose Connect app. To manually pair a SoundLink Flex with another Bose Bluetooth speaker, make sure both speakers are powered on and one speaker is connected to your mobile device. On the speaker connected to your device, press and hold the Bluetooth and the Volume up (+) buttons simultaneously. Release the buttons when you hear “Press the Bluetooth and Volume down buttons simultaneously on a second Bose device.” On the other speaker, press and hold the Bluetooth and Volume down (–) buttons simultaneously. Release the buttons when the speaker emits a tone. After about 10 seconds, you hear “Party mode” from both speakers simultaneously. Party mode is enabled, and you are now able to play audio in unison using your mobile device. For more information about manual pairing, including how to enable stereo mode, please refer to the SoundLink Flex Owner’s guide.

    Is SoundLink Flex’s USB-C charging port waterproof and dustproof?

    Yes. All of SoundLink Flex’s components, including the USB-C charging port, are built with rugged, waterproof materials. If water or dust enters the USB-C port, the speaker won’t be damaged, because its interior components are sealed tightly to ensure protection from water, dust, and debris. If debris gets into the charging port, you can gently brush it out (while taking care not to damage the pins). You can also gently rinse the port with fresh water (let it dry before operating the speaker).

    Portable speaker Bose SoundLink Micro

    • Description

    • Peculiarities

    • Characteristics

    • Set

    Description Portable speaker Bose SoundLink Micro

    If you can’t live without music even for a day, but also like hiking and frequent trips, then the Bose SoundLink Micro Bluetooth Blue portable speakers are just right for you. The new development of BOSE company allows music to be always with you. It’s a small system with big ambitions, super strong and waterproof, and equipped with a silicone strap for attachment – a worthy choice for connoisseurs of good sound and a high level of reliability.

    From the unique design to the refined speaker system, every detail of the Bose SoundLink Micro Blue has one goal – to reproduce the owner’s favorite music at the highest possible level. The company’s engineers approached the issue of developing this speaker with special attention and offer something that similar products of the same size cannot provide.

    SoundLink Micro Blue is always with you. You can attach it to your bike or backpack and turn on your favorite track at any time. The durable silicone strap withstands strong pressure and always protects the column from drops.

    From a portable speaker, users require high resistance during ingress of water or other liquid. I would like the speaker to survive not only the first wetness, but all subsequent ones without consequences. At the very beginning, the developers focused on the IP7 water protection level. As a result, the test results exceeded the required characteristics. After a variety of tests for water resistance and dust resistance, it became clear that this device, not only in words, will withstand a lot. The manufacturer guarantees the operation of the device after you accidentally drop it into the pool or the sea.

    The system is very easy to manage using the BOSE Connect App. After connecting multiple devices via Bluetooth, you can easily and quickly switch between them. Want more powerful sound? Connect two speakers at once! Party mode will provide maximum performance. You can also connect in stereo mode: two speakers will work as a right and left speaker.

    Features Portable acoustics Bose SoundLink Micro

    1. The best Bose engineers tried to display only the best in their new brainchild: powerful sound, compactness and moisture protection.
    2. Super durable plastic speaker housing covered with a layer of soft-touch rubber provides reliable protection against water penetration, according to the IP7 standard.
    3. The ideal combination for travel – dedicated bike mount, compact size 9.83 x 9.83 x 3.48 and light weight 290 grams.
    4. Proprietary application provides affordable connection of several devices – listen to stereo sound by decomposing the audio stream into channels.

    Specifications Bose SoundLink Micro 9 portable speaker0013

    • Sound – Mono
    • Power – Battery
    • Number of strips AC – 1
    • Battery Type – Own
    • Interfaces – Bluetooth, Mini-Jack 3.5 mm
    • Functions – Integrated microphone
    • Features – Waterproof housing
    • Operating time – 6 h
    • Dimensions – 98 x 98 x 35 mm

    Kit Portable speaker Bose SoundLink Micro

    • USB cable
    • Documentation
    • Power supply
    • Portable acoustics Bose SoundLink Micro Blue

    Kristina Razumovskaya

    We often go to the mountains with our family and the Bose SoundLink Micro suits our lifestyle perfectly. Compact, waterproof, shockproof and with a convenient mount)). Just a dream of a music lover-alpinist!

    Slava Mishin

    This time they did a great job with the form factor. Universal fastener that can be attached anywhere and safely get ready for the road. The waterproof case is a topic that deserves special praise! Everything sounds great, the deep bass on the first listen made my day! I recommend!

    Previous

    Next

    POPULAR GOODS

    Dyson Airwrap Complete Long Styler
    RUB 24,990 RUB 59,990

    lf

    Dyson Airwrap Complete Styler
    RUB 19,990 RUB 59,990

    dys air

    Dyson Supersonic hair dryer
    RUB 14,990 RUB 39,990

    dys-f

    Dyson Supersonic Hairdryer Stand
    RUB 3,990 RUB 6,990

    dp

    basket

    Code:

    Thank you for your order!

    Our manager will contact you.

    Portable acoustics Bose SoundLink Color Yekaterinburg

    Design. More practical and smarter

    Many of those who hear the SoundLink Mini for the first time in their lives fall in love with the speaker forever. Only one thing stopped some of them from buying: the cost of such a miniature little thing was a decent couple of hundred dollars. In addition, the strict design, the lack of color schemes and the sharp edges of the case left the active and modern youth outside the target audience. On reflection, Bose decided to win over these people too. And she did it completely differently than other manufacturers would have done.

    Vertical portable speaker is a rarity these days. Now almost all mobile acoustics are trying to be like brick soundbar. In order to join the trend, some brands even abandon the features of corporate design. Bose doesn’t do that. If the column is as minimalistic as possible. And preferably with a slight touch of retro.

    The result is impressive. Thick matte plastic, rubberized convex keys and a complete “stuffing” in terms of audio – this is a summary of the experimental, but successful SoundLink Color.

    I can easily understand those who don’t like Bose’s “budget” speaker design. In a similar way, the world reacted to the iPhone 5C, released in a plastic case instead of a metal one. But the difference is that Bose tried . The matte plastic here is thick, high-quality: nothing creaks or backlash, no matter how hard you try. Completely monolithic construction. The texture is also nothing – it reflects the light a la metallic, but at the same time it does not turn into a mirror. In general, matte plastic on the column is the key to maintaining its normal appearance for a long time.

    The matt finish adds a special meaning to the choice of color at the time of purchase. The most boring is black. All the rest look just gorgeous: I personally like the white and blue options the most. Unlike the strict Spartan Mini, the Color model can and should be placed in bright or practical interiors: in the kitchen, in the nursery, in the bathroom, and so on. If your apartment doesn’t look like an Apple Store, the SoundLink Color will fit in even better than the mini. Maybe I just have a weakness for retro minimalism, but for the design I want to give the device a solid five. It turned out juicy, but calmly and confidently, without teenage complexes a la “please notice me”.

    There are six speaker control keys on the top side. Under two of them there is an LED (power and Bluetooth), and the rest are just buttons with predictable functionality. Given the portability, the track rewind keys would not hurt, so as not to reach for the smartphone once again. But they are almost nowhere now, and the situation is not a problem.

    As usual, there are a minimum of ports. Built-in battery for 8 hours is charged in about 2-3 hours via micro-USB port, cable included. You can also connect any source to the speaker via an ordinary 3. 5mm minijack wire. Unlike the high-end model, you can’t connect a charging dock here – but you don’t need to with this shape either.

    Interestingly, when you first turn on the column, it offers to assign the voice of an “assistant” to it, pronouncing messages about the status of work – connecting to a source, activating pairing mode, and so on. This is a full-fledged speech synthesizer that can form words: for example, it pronounces the name of a connected Bluetooth device (“iPhone Nikita”). Several voice languages ​​are available to choose from, including Russian! Of course, in terms of intonation, the Bose synthesizer is very far from the humanoid Siri, but the system works predictably well. And, I repeat, there is Russian – it’s already great 🙂

    The SoundLink Color is 13 centimeters high and 12 cm wide, and in reality it is not noticeable due to the rounded shape of the body. The easiest way to imagine the dimensions of the device is to pick up the iPhone 6: its height generally corresponds to both the length and width 🙂 But the speaker has a decent weight, which is explained by a serious selection of speakers inside. Half a kilo will easily dissolve in a travel or hiking bag, and they are unlikely to be noticeable in a backpack. At the same time, this is not the best option for those who are looking for the most portable acoustics. Rather, it is a stationary thing with the ability to drag it to friends or rooms without being tied to wires.

    Sound. All the best for the young

    Bose and Apple have a lot in common. Both companies clearly respect aluminum, are deeply tech savvy, and don’t like to list detailed technical data on their official websites. I rummaged through the Internet in search of an answer to a simple question: what speakers are inside the novelty? Didn’t find anything. But then I looked through the perforation in the rear panel and, in principle, found out all the necessary information.

    The exterior of the Bose SoundLink Color hints at one large mono speaker inside. It’s not like that at all. Inside, I saw at least two radiators of the same size as in the SoundLink Mini. And there, let me remind you, there are quite powerful stereo speakers that perfectly reproduce the entire spectrum of frequencies, especially high ones. By the way, the Mini model owes its success to the presence of two branded passive radiators that produce such a clear and rich bass that almost all other portable speakers want to be thrown out the window. Based on my observations, the Color has one such emitter, right above the stereo pair of speakers.

    The first and final impression of the sound of the SoundLink Color is honest joy and delight. Once again, Bose did not let the audience down, offering great sound even in the “budget” model. The mood is created by bright and really clean, even a little “dry” high frequencies – a rarity for portable acoustics, often choking in symbilants due to insufficiently powerful components. Here, the highs sound “out of size” great, and the mids are not lost in the whistle and ringing of instruments and vocals. We seem to owe all this to the same technologies as in the older model.

    The presence of a proprietary passive radiator plays a key role in the perception (and satisfaction from) sound. It is he who is responsible for the entire spectrum of low frequencies, filling the music with depth, rhythm and drive. I can’t say for 100% that there is exactly one such emitter here, but such an option would explain the difference between this speaker and the SoundLink Mini. The low ones in the first case are still weaker: in particular, the “hit” is not so powerful, amazing. But it is still there, and still gives an expressive effect, as if the low frequencies are separated from the rest and are reproduced separately, not drowning out, but complementing the work of excellent stereo speakers.

    Good stuff

    The Bose SoundLink Color is a simplified version of the legendary SoundLink Mini. There are no docking stations in the kit, but there is a choice of bright, cool color schemes for the case. There is no metal, but there is a practical matte plastic.

    Bean grinder coffee machine: 9 Best Coffee Makers With Grinders of 2023

    Опубликовано: April 14, 2023 в 4:36 pm

    Автор:

    Категории: Miscellaneous

    9 Best Coffee Makers With Grinders of 2023

    We’ve been independently researching and testing products for over 120 years. If you buy through our links, we may earn a commission. Learn more about our review process.

    1

    Best Overall

    Breville The Grind Control Coffee Maker

    1

    Best Overall

    Breville The Grind Control Coffee Maker

    $350 at Amazon$450 at Walmart$350 at Sur la Table

    Credit: Breville

    Pros
    • Top-performing grinder
    • Six grind settings
    • Easy-to-read digital display
    Cons
    • Expensive

    Breville’s coffee maker with grinder was a top performer in our tests.

    Though on the pricey side, it was one of the few contenders that could produce fine, medium and coarse grinds that were consistent with what you would get from a high-quality standalone coffee grinder. It has a burr grinder with six grind-size settings to choose from so you can customize your coffee or change settings if you swap beans. Because the hopper can hold a half pound of beans, you don’t need to refill it every time you brew coffee.

    We also found the digital display very easy to read; it shows the number of cups to be brewed and the strength setting. As an added bonus, the front-facing digital display indicates how much water is in the tank, so you don’t need to lean over to the side to check your water level like with some other coffee makers. It also produced one of the tastiest cups of coffee: smooth without a hint of bitterness.

      Grinder type Burr
      Hopper capacity 8 ounces
      No. of grind settings 6
      Carafe type Thermal
      Dimensions 11 x 14.8 x 19.1 inches

      Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

      2

      Best Value

      Black+Decker Mill and Brew Coffeemaker

      2

      Best Value

      Black+Decker Mill and Brew Coffeemaker

      Now 32% Off

      $68 at Amazon$72 at Home Depot$90 at Walmart

      Credit: Black+Decker

      Pros
      • Quietest built-in grinder
      • Displays on screen how long its been since the coffee brewed
      • Produces consistent grinds
      Cons
      • No hopper to hold beans

      There’s no getting around the noise of a coffee grinder, but this Black+Decker grinder was the quietest of all the coffee makers we tested.

      In addition, we found it was able to produce the same grind consistently, even better than some of the more expensive machines. Within our taste test, it produced one of the better cups of coffee with a pleasant aroma and flavor. The grinder is also uniquely located inside the filter basket, so you can clean the basket and the grinder at the same time.

      The downside to this model: You need to add beans every time you make coffee since there is no hopper to hold extra beans. That said, it works with whole beans or pre-ground coffee, and it has an on-screen display that shows how long it’s been since the coffee was brewed.

          Grinder type Blade
          Hopper capacity N/A
          No. of grind settings 1
          Carafe type Glass
          Dimensions 10 x 13.5 x 15.5 inches

          Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

          3

          Easiest to Use

          Cuisinart Grind & Brew Coffeemaker

          3

          Easiest to Use

          Cuisinart Grind & Brew Coffeemaker

          $300 at Amazon$399 at Walmart

          Credit: Cuisinart

          Pros
          • Easy to use
          • Fast brew time
          • Can also use pre-ground coffee
          Cons
          • Only has one grind size setting

          Our pros gave this machine high marks because it was one of the easiest to use coffee makers with a built-in grinder and had one of the quickest brew times, making it great for those who want a fuss-free fast coffee-making experience.

          Even if you haven’t read the instruction manual (and are uncaffeinated), navigating the control panel is a breeze. Another nice perk is that you won’t have to refill the hopper as often since it holds a half pound of whole beans, though we didn’t love that it only has one grind setting. Using pre-ground beans is an option too.

          The coffee basket swings forward, so there’s no worrying about it hitting low cabinets. We love the thermal carafe that keeps the coffee warm, but if you prefer, there’s also a glass carafe option available.

            Grinder type Burr
            Hopper capacity 8 ounces
            No. of grind settings 1
            Carafe type Thermal or glass
            Dimensions 13.1 x 10 x 18.1 inches

            Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

            4

            Best Single Serve

            Cuisinart Grind & Brew Single-Serve Coffee Maker

            4

            Best Single Serve

            Cuisinart Grind & Brew Single-Serve Coffee Maker

            $146 at Amazon$103 at Walmart$275 at Bloomingdale’s

            Credit: Cuisinart

            Pros
            • Grinds whole coffee beans for a single cup of coffee
            • Can use a reusable capsule or a K-cup
            • Easy to use
            Cons
            • Grinding and brewing is a 2-step process

            Most single-serve coffee makers require a coffee pod to brew one mug’s worth, but this Cuisinart coffee maker is unique in that it prepares a single cup of coffee from freshly ground beans. In fact, we loved it so much we gave it a spot in our Kitchen Gear and Coffee Awards.

            Here’s how it works: It grinds whole beans into a reusable capsule that catches the grinds. After closing the reusable pod, it goes into the capsule holder like a regular pod and after pushing start produces a freshly brewed single cup of coffee. Unfortunately, since it’s a two-step process, you can’t push a button and walk away. However, it also can brew from a K-cup for mornings when you’re in a rush and offers size options of 8, 10 or 12 ounces.

            Our pros found this machine intuitive to use without having to read the instruction manual. The 48-ounce water tank detaches so you can easily refill. Overall, we found the coffee we brewed was entirely satisfying with a medium body.

            Grinder type Burr
            Hopper capacity 3.5 ounces
            No. of grind settings 1
            Carafe type N/A
            Dimensions 11 x 7. 3 x 12.7 inches

            Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

            5

            Best K-Cup

            Cuisinart Grind & Brew Plus

            5

            Best K-Cup

            Cuisinart Grind & Brew Plus

            $230 at Amazon$230 at Sur la Table$230 at Walmart

            Credit: Cuisinart

            Pros
            • Can make coffee with whole beans, pre-ground coffee or single-serve pods
            • Blade grinder and housing are removable for easy cleaning and clog prevention
            • Has an indicator light for when it’s time to decalcify coffee maker
            Cons
            • No hopper to hold beans
            • Single-serve option does not grind whole beans

            This Cuisinart Grind & Brew Plus offers customization and convenience in one machine, allowing you to make fresh coffee from whole beans, pre-ground coffee or pods.

            One side of the machine is for making drip coffee; it can grind whole beans or use pre-ground coffee, and it lets you choose the strength setting. But since it doesn’t have a hopper, you’ll need to keep refilling the beans. The other side is for just for single-serve cups, and it does not grind; it uses pods or a reusable pod filter (sold separately).

            While it didn’t have the highest score in our taste test, the convenient pod option can be helpful for days when you need just one cup. The coffee grinder and housing are removable for easy cleaning and to help prevent any clogging. Plus, there’s an indicator light so you know when it’s time to decalcify the machine.

              Grinder type Blade
              Hopper capacity N/A
              No. of grind settings 1
              Carafe type Glass
              Dimensions 10.8 x 11.7 x 15.9 inches

              Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

              6

              Best Frother

              De’Longhi Dinamica Plus Fully Automatic Coffee Maker & Espresso Machine

              6

              Best Frother

              De’Longhi Dinamica Plus Fully Automatic Coffee Maker & Espresso Machine

              $1,400 at Williams Sonoma

              Credit: DeLonghi

              Pros
              • Favorite among our Lab experts
              • Makes specialty drinks like lattes automatically
              • Milk frother is automatic
              Cons
              • Expensive

              This De’Longhi coffee and espresso maker is a favorite among our Lab experts for its ability to produce superb-tasting drinks from espressos and lattes to iced with a few taps on the touchscreen.

              Simply choose the type and size of beverage you want, and the machine automatically does everything else for you including grinding, brewing and frothing. Though it does come with an app, we found that it was fairly basic and didn’t add much to the user experience.

              Even better: It also rinses out the spout at the beginning so you can be sure there’s no leftover coffee residue in your cup. We were impressed with the quality of the espresso with a rich crema and how simple it is to use the milk frother that froths on its own for a truly hands-off experience that doesn’t get much easier.

                Grinder type Burr
                Hopper capacity 10.5 ounces
                No. of grind settings 13
                Carafe type N/A
                Dimensions 9.3 x 17 x 13.75 inches

                Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                7

                Best for Extra-Hot Coffee

                Capresso CoffeeTeam TS

                7

                Best for Extra-Hot Coffee

                Capresso CoffeeTeam TS

                Now 33% Off

                $217 at Amazon$218 at Wayfair$260 at Saks Fifth Avenue

                Credit: Capresso

                Pros
                • Coffee comes out piping hot at the right temperature
                • Makes tasty coffee
                Cons
                • Not a large difference between grind sizes
                • Grind settings are not labeled

                This Capresso machine aced our tests for brewing at the proper temperature, delivering piping hot coffee that was one of the tastiest of the bunch. To ensure your coffee stays nice and hot as long as possible, the thermal carafe can go from coffee maker to table.

                The hopper can hold 6 ounces of whole beans, enough to make approximately 20 cups of coffee. The conical burr coffee grinder has five settings, and while they were easy to change, they were not labeled, making it easy to miss. We also found that there wasn’t a large size difference between the smallest and large grind setting.

                  Grinder type Burr
                  Hopper capacity 6 ounces
                  No. of grind settings 5
                  Carafe type Thermal
                  Dimensions 9 x 9.5x 15.5 inches

                  Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                  8

                  Best Automatic

                  Spinn Espresso & Coffee Machine

                  8

                  Best Automatic

                  Spinn Espresso & Coffee Machine

                  $799 at Amazon

                  Credit: Spinn

                  Pros
                  • App is easy to use
                  • Beans sold through app are brewed based on the manufacturer’s recommendations
                  • Brews nitro-like coffee
                  Cons
                  • Does not have a built-in frother
                  • Expensive

                  The Spinn coffee maker is a favorite among our experts, so much so we gave it one of our Kitchen Gear and Coffee Awards. The reasons are plentiful: It makes a variety of flavorful coffees, the app is easy to use with custom options available and the large hopper holds up to 18 ounces of beans.

                  With this machine, there’s also no guessing the grind size or manually adjusting the grind setting for each drink. The burr grinder automatically selects the correct grind size to optimize each drink. We love that beans are sold directly through the app, and if you input the specific coffee type into the app, it will brew it using the manufacturer’s recommendations.

                  Our Lab experts were impressed with the unique nitro-like brew option, a feature you don’t often see with other machines, and our testers confirmed that it produces a strong cup of coffee similar to nitro. In fact, one tester declared this was the best coffee they’ve ever had. One thing it does not have is a built-in frother so it will have to be purchased separately.

                  Grinder type Burr
                  Hopper capacity 18 ounces
                  No. of grind settings Customizable
                  Carafe type N/A
                  Dimensions 13.5 x 8.5 x 14 inches

                  Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                  9

                  Best for Espresso

                  Breville Barista Pro Espresso Machine

                  9

                  Best for Espresso

                  Breville Barista Pro Espresso Machine

                  $850 at Amazon$850 at Bloomingdale’s$1,023 at Walmart

                  Credit: Breville

                  Pros
                  • 30 grind sizes
                  • 5 temperature options
                  • Easy-to-read LCD screen
                  Cons
                  • Expensive

                  Breville drip coffee makers are consistently a top pick in our tests, so it’s no surprise we also love the Barista Pro espresso machine. If you like to fine-tune your coffee or change the grind size depending on the type of bean, the Barista Pro has 30 different grind sizes and five temperatures to choose from.

                  We like that it has an easy-to-read LCD screen, so customizing your coffee drink is incredibly simple. The machine heats up in three seconds and has digital temperature control, which ensures the water temperature is within two degrees celsius of the correct brewing temperature to precisely extract the perfect cup of espresso.

                    Grinder type Burr
                    Hopper capacity 8 ounces
                    No. of grind settings 30
                    Carafe type N/A
                    Dimensions 13 x 12 x 13 inches

                    Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                    How we test coffee makers with built-in grinders

                    To determine the best coffee makers with built-in grinders, we collected and analyzed over 270 data points.

                    We first test them exactly how we test drip coffee makers: We brew at least two full pots of coffee in each drip machine and record the brew time, the brew temperature and how well the coffee stays warm over a two-hour time span. We also pay attention to consistency, as we do when we test espresso machines and single-serve coffee makers. As part of our brew tests, we conduct a sensory test and get as many people as we can to sample each coffee and share their tasting notes.

                    In addition to performance, we assess ease of use by scoring a number of factors including whether the user guide is straightforward to follow and how painless it is to operate the controls, access the water tank and brew basket, read the markings on the tank and carafe and clean the carafe and more.

                    After fully testing each coffee maker’s brewing abilities, we then appraise the built-in grinder. We evaluate how easy it is to fill the hopper, record the loudness of the grinding process using a decibel meter, and note how many different grind sizes are available. Finally, we then analyze grind-size accuracy, grind uniformity and grind consistency using a Kruve Sifter to determine the ground coffee particle sizes down to the micrometer.

                    Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                    What to know when shopping for a coffee maker with grinder

                    ✔️ Grinder type: Coffee makers with built-in blade grinders are either blade or burr grinders. Blade grinders work like food processors in which the blades spin to chop the coffee beans. Burr grinders are similar to pepper mills so two metal or plastic grinding surfaces mill the coffee into ground pieces. Blade grinders
                    tend to be less expensive than burr grinders, but that often comes with the trade-off of having only one grind-size setting. If you like to adjust your grind settings, the pricier built-in burr grinders often have more settings to choose from.

                    ✔️ Hopper capacity: Hoppers can hold different amounts of beans; consider a larger hopper, such as 8 ounces or larger, if you don’t want to refill often. Also, note that if the machine does not have a hopper, you’ll need to fill the coffee maker with beans each time you brew.

                    ✔️ Number of grind settings: If you like to fine-tune the grind size of the coffee, look for machines that have multiple grind settings. The size of the grind affects the taste of the coffee: the finer the grind, the stronger the coffee.

                    ✔️ Carafe type: Glass and thermal carafes each have their pros and cons. Glass carafes tend to be less expensive, lightweight and easy to clean as they are often dishwasher-safe. Thermal carafes are typically more expensive but can keep coffee hot for hours without using a warming plate, which means you don’t have to worry about whether you shut the coffee maker off and can bring the carafe directly to the table.

                    ✔️ Customization and convenience: Beyond grind-size settings, coffee makers with grinders may also have customization options such as coffee-cup size and strength. More advanced machines can make coffeehouse-style drinks, like lattes, at the push of a button without the need for manual tamping or frothing. However, you’ll often pay much more for this amenity. A general rule of thumb, the more convenient and hands-off the coffee machine, the higher the price. Be sure to pay attention to which features are worth the extra money to fit your lifestyle.

                    Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                    Is it better to have a separate coffee grinder?

                    Having a separate coffee grinder may be better for some people but not for others. Coffee enthusiasts may like having a stand-alone grinder to make different coffee types beyond drip coffee, such as pour-over or French press, because there are more grind settings. The downside is that it’s an extra step to making coffee, which is not as streamlined as a coffee maker with a built-in grinder and it’s also an added purchase.

                    Coffee makers with built-in grinders offer the convenience of grinding the beans, and often automatically starting the brewing process. It’s best for those who want to save time and effort by having freshly ground beans and coffee at the push of a button or two. Just note, if the machine or grinder breaks over time, you’ll have to replace the entire machine. Plus, switching beans is harder since you’ll have to wait until the hopper is completely empty before adding new beans.

                    Advertisement – Continue Reading Below

                    Why trust Good Housekeeping?

                    Jamie Kim’s first job at Good Housekeeping Institute was testing a variety of consumer products, and one of her first tests was drip coffee makers. Since then, she has tested and written about many kitchen-related and cooking tools, but especially drip coffee and espresso makers as well as coffee accessories. She has a passion for coffee and has completed rigorous coffee courses from the SCA (Specialty Coffee Association) in coffee brewing, barista skills and sensory tasting.

                    Jamie Kim

                    Contributing Writer and Analyst

                    Jamie Kim is a consumer products expert with over 17 years of experience in areas of product development and manufacturing. She has held leading roles at both mid-size consumer goods companies and one of the most notable and largest apparel brands in the world. Jamie has contributed to several of the GH Institute Labs, including Kitchen Appliances, Media and Tech, Textiles and Home Appliances. In her free time she enjoys cooking, traveling, and working out.

                    The 7 Best Coffee Makers With Grinders of 2023

                    If asked the best tip for brewing a delicious cup of coffee, many experts would offer the same advice: Use freshly ground beans. Coffee is richest, and truest to its natural flavor, when beans are brewed within minutes of grinding—that’s why coffee makers with built-in grinders are such a luxury. While they are more expensive than standard coffee makers, purchasing one is often more cost-effective than buying a separate grinder. Plus, these two-in-one items save space in the kitchen.

                    Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Wayfair
                    View On Williams-Sonoma

                    What We Like

                    • Includes a number of customizable settings

                    • Easy-to-use interface

                    • Tasteful aesthetic

                    • Fresh, high-quality coffee

                    What We Don’t Like

                    Breville The Grind Control Review

                    Out of the 20-plus coffee makers with grinders that we tested, the Breville Grind Control stood out as the best all-around device. Right away, you notice the small LCD screen on top, which is unique for a drip coffee maker and makes it easy to manage the item’s many settings. The LCD screen also provides real-time feedback throughout the coffee-making process. Another unique and likable feature, especially for fans of Keurigs and Nespresso machines, is that the Breville Grind Control can brew one cup at a time.

                    In addition to its single-serve capabilities, this machine can make up to 12 cups of coffee in roughly six minutes, grinding included. It offers an impressive eight strength settings and is fully programmable, so you can select a time in advance for the machine to grind the beans and brew a fresh pot. We were impressed by how fast the grinder works, as well as the fact that no grounds ended up in the pot. The bean hopper holds a half-pound of coffee beans, and it’s easy to add or remove beans when you want to brew a different type. The machine also comes with a removable gold filter, eliminating the need to buy countless paper ones.

                    The item is easy to clean and take apart—an area that can occasionally be an issue for coffee makers with grinders. Two of the only downsides are the high price tag and that the machine feels a little bulky; otherwise, the Grind Control is a convenient machine that makes strong and consistent coffee.

                    Price at time of publication: $330 

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Burr | Bean Hopper: 8 ounces | Capacity: 12 cups (60 ounces) | Dimensions: 8.5 x 12.5 x 16.3 inches | Warranty: 1-year limited

                    Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Wayfair
                    View On Walmart

                    What We Like

                    What We Don’t Like

                    • Blade grinder

                    • Prone to leaking

                    • Loud grinder

                    The Black + Decker Mill and Brew delivers freshly ground coffee at an affordable price. One major reason it’s cheaper than most coffee makers with grinders is because it has a blade grinder instead of a burr grinder. Experts widely prefer burr grinders because they are more consistent and produce less heat when grinding. But even though this Black + Decker model doesn’t have the best grinder out there, we still found it suitable. Our main criticism is that it’s fairly loud, rather than any larger issues like that the grounds come out uneven. Expect to lose a little flavor in comparison to higher-end models.

                    We found several other benefits that make this machine worth purchasing, one of which is its ease of use. Large, well-labeled buttons make it intuitive, while the removable filter and grinder are simple to clean in the sink, with no need to brush out grounds from difficult-to-reach places. The brew basket is top-rack dishwasher-safe. A clear window lets you see how much water is in the machine, so you’ll always be sure you have enough for the next brew. The grinder can be turned off easily if you want to use pre-ground beans, while the strength selector lets you choose from three different coffee strengths.

                    Price at time of publication: $100

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Blade | Bean Hopper: Designed for one full carafe | Capacity: 12 cups (60 ounces) | Dimensions: 13 x 11 x 16 inches | Warranty: 2-year limited

                    Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Walmart
                    View On Williams-Sonoma

                    What We Like

                    What We Don’t Like

                    The best place to start a review of the Cuisinart Grind and Brew Thermal Coffeemaker is with a feature that helps users start their mornings: the 24-programmable function. You can program the machine in the evening and be greeted by a fresh cup of coffee in the morning, right when you wake up. The 10-cup carafe is thermal, so it can keep coffee at the ideal temperature even if you sleep in late.

                    The brewing device is equipped with a burr grinder, which is superior to the cheaper alternative of blade grinders. The grind size is adjustable, letting users tinker with flavor preferences from bolder to milder pots of joe. For those always in a hurry, there’s a pause feature so you can pour your first cup before brewing is complete. The hopper holds a half-pound of beans, and it has a lid to keep the beans fresh before grinding. The machine comes with a permanent gold filter for the grounds and includes a water filter to remove impurities before brewing.

                    As far as taste goes, this maker produced a strong, classic cup of coffee—exactly what you picture when thinking of drip coffee. It took seven minutes and 13 seconds for the pot to finish brewing, which leans slightly toward the slower side but isn’t too bad.

                    Price at time of publication: $268

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Burr | Bean Hopper: 8 ounces | Capacity: 10 cups (50 ounces) | Dimensions: 8.27 x 11.61 x 16.34 inches | Warranty: 3-year limited

                     Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Wayfair
                    View On Walmart

                    What We Like

                    What We Don’t Like

                    We Tried the Breville the Barista Express and It Was Impressive

                    The Breville Barista Express is versatile, long-lasting, and stylish. While there might be a small learning curve involved, it’s easy to brew rich espresso shots with the café-worthy group head. A built-in steam wand allows for delicious lattes and cappuccinos. In fact, the wand is so advanced that you can even make microfoam designs on top of your drink like a real barista. “Microfoam is basically thousands or millions of very small bubbles that form through the steaming process,” says Paulo Asi. “If you’re trying to make microfoam at home, be sure to heat up the milk first, then run the milk frother. It won’t work if it’s not heated up.”

                    The bean grinder uses conical burrs, so it’s stronger and more consistent than a steel blade grinder. There’s also an easy-to-use dial that lets you choose the coarseness of your grind, which you typically want on the finer side for espresso.

                    The Barista Express is fairly expensive, but the quality justifies the price. The item has received glowing comments from thousands of happy customers, including us. The machine made excellent espresso drinks with a rich crema every single time.

                    Price at time of publication: $750

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Burr | Bean Hopper: 8 ounces | Capacity: Single serve | Dimensions: 12.8 x 12.2 x 13.1 inches | Warranty: 1-year limited

                    The 10 Best Thermal Carafe Coffee Makers of 2023, Tested and Reviewed

                    Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Wayfair
                    View On Abt.com

                    What We Like

                    What We Don’t Like

                    When your coffee of choice is espresso or espresso-based drinks, this machine lets you grind, brew, and make creamy lattes or cappuccinos with ease. As the name suggests, the De’Longhi Dinamica with LatteCrema is of café quality. Its conical burr grinder is perfect for espresso grinds and doesn’t overheat the beans or leave behind any unsavory flavors. The grinder is also one of the quietest that we tested, which is an added bonus. If you have pre-ground beans, you can bypass the grinder and just brew.

                    While the price is certainly expensive, this coffee maker is super-automatic, so it handles so much of the brewing process for you. It can whip up 18 different drinks, including iced coffee, at the touch of a button. The milk frother is strong enough to handle all kinds of milk, including oat and almond milk, and it’s dishwasher-safe when you’re finished.

                    The main issue we came across is that the Dinamica may take some time to understand. It wasn’t intuitive, and that initial setup was fairly rigorous—partially due to the machine’s sophistication and number of features that are offered. Once you get through any initial hiccups it’s no longer difficult. All in all, this is a top-of-the-line product from a trusted brand.

                    Price at time of publication: $1,400

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Burr | Bean Hopper: 10.5 ounces | Capacity: Single serve | Dimensions: 16. 9 x 9.3 x 13.7 inches | Warranty: 2 years (3 years if product is registered)

                    Indulge in the Best High-End Coffee Makers for the Perfect Cup

                    Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Wayfair
                    View On Walmart

                    • Compatible with pods and whole bean coffee

                    • Easy to use and clean

                    • Great for beginners and longtime coffee drinkers

                    • Blade grinder

                    • Bulky design

                    The Cuisinart Coffee Center Grind and Brew Plus is the best of both worlds. It has a 12-cup pot for when you want coffee around all day or for the whole family, and it takes coffee pods, including K-Cups, when you’re in the mood for a single cup. That’s not even mentioning the built-in grinder, which leads to a fresher taste and more flavor.

                    We naturally encountered some drawbacks when testing the coffee maker but still recommend it overall. First, it uses a blade grinder instead of a burr grinder, which is less consistent and much louder than many alternatives we tested. The whole device feels a little bulky too, largely as a result of having the pod-compatible brewer on one side. It took about nine minutes to brew a full pot of coffee, which was one of the longest times out of more than 20 different coffee makers.

                    The pros outweigh the cons, though. The coffee is bold on both sides of the machine, and the full pot measured 188 degrees when we poured the first cup, which was the hottest that we tested. It’s also reasonably priced for a coffee maker with a grinder, let alone one that works with pods, too.

                    Price at time of publish: $230

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Blade | Bean Hopper: 7 ounces | Capacity: 12 cups | Dimensions: 10.75 x 11.73 x 15.93 inches | Warranty: 3-year limited

                    The 9 Best Single-Serve Coffee Makers of 2023, Tested and Reviewed

                    Amazon

                    View On Amazon
                    View On Wayfair
                    View On Williams-Sonoma

                    What We Like

                    • Tasty, customizable drinks

                    • Quiet burr grinder

                    • Easy to use and clean

                    • Powerful milk frothing

                    What We Don’t Like

                    • Expensive

                    The Miele CM5310 Silence is an upgraded version of the Miele CM5300 Series, which we also recommended after testing. This time, we gave the Miele CM5310 Silence an even higher rating than the previous model, commending its design, performance, and ease of cleaning, all of which makes it our top super-automatic coffee maker.

                    What does super-automatic mean? It denotes a device that handles every step of the coffee-making process for you, from grinding beans to brewing. They are generally expensive but have a variety of customizable features and can brew both coffee and espresso drinks. The Miele CM5310 Silence fits this description.

                    The high-end coffee maker offers more than 10 drink options and has the ability to brew 40 ounces of drip-style coffee. We found that the machine works fairly quickly, too, taking 22 seconds to brew an espresso shot, which is on the faster side of all espresso makers that we tested. Miele also accomplished its goal of making the CM5310 Silence quiet when grinding by adding excellent soundproofing around the burrs.

                    Even though the sleek, minimalist machine may look confusing, it’s surprisingly straightforward and can save the coffee preferences of multiple users for quicker, easier selections. It’s certainly a splurge pick but one that we recommend and that users can trust for years and years.

                    Price at time of publish: $1,799

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Grinder: Burr | Bean Hopper: 7 ounces | Capacity: Up to 40 ounces | Dimensions: 9.5 x 14.25 x 18.125 inches | Warranty: 2-year limited

                    The Best Budget Coffee Makers, Tested by Our Experts

                    Final Verdict

                    The Breville Grind Control Coffee Maker has everything you could want in a drip machine with a built-in grinder. It’s programmable and compact and has a burr grinder instead of a cheaper blade grinder. Those who are interested in a slightly more affordable option may prefer the Cuisinart DGB-850 Grind & Brew Coffeemaker

                    How We Tested

                    We purchased 24 popular and top-rated coffee makers with built-in grinders and tested them side by side in our Lab. Some tests were quantifiable—we measured coffee temperature and the time it took to brew a full pot. In other tests our team of experts rated key areas on a five-point scale. Key areas that we assessed include: performance, design, and ease of cleaning. From there, we whittled down the best options to present the list above, full of products that we recommend and that you can trust to brew fresh, consistent coffee.

                    Learn More About How We Test Products

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Other Options We Tested

                    • Gevi 10-Cup Drip Coffee Maker with Grinder: This coffee maker is a solid, well-rounded option, but it doesn’t stand out enough to include on the list. It’s easy to use, and we enjoyed the coffee it brews; however, there are alternatives at a similar or even cheaper price that offer the same performance.
                    • Chefman Grind and Brew Coffee Maker: While the affordable price tag and compact design are appealing, this little brewer didn’t perform well enough in our testing process to recommend it. It’s hard to clean, and the blade grinder doesn’t noticeably improve the flavor of the coffee.
                    • Krups Grind and Brew KM785: We were disappointed by the taste of the coffee from this machine. On top of weak and watery coffee, it took almost 10 minutes to brew a full pot, which was one of the longest intervals we came across in the testing process.

                    What to Look for in a Coffee Maker with Grinder

                    Burr vs. Blade

                    Coffee grinders will use either burrs or blades. Burrs are the far-superior option, as they offer a more even and consistent grind; they also don’t produce as much heat, so the coffee’s taste isn’t altered when grinding. However, burr grinders are significantly more expensive. The decision may come down to your budget. Luckily, both burrs and blades make each pot of coffee a little fresher.

                    Features

                    Coffee makers with grinders can also come equipped with a variety of other features. Some have all kinds of bells and whistles, from automatic shut-offs to flavor strength and even temperature control. Other machines are simpler but still make delicious coffee. If you’re looking for convenience, be prepared to pay the price for advanced models.

                    Capacity

                    While larger-capacity coffee makers generally sound more appealing, a 14-cup carafe might not always be best for your coffee needs, especially if you only drink one or two cups a day. Consider the number of coffee drinkers in your home, as well as your own coffee intake. If you’re primarily purchasing a drip machine for personal use, keep an eye out for items with 1- to 4-cup setting.

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    FAQs

                    Is it worth buying a coffee maker with a grinder?

                    Having access to a coffee grinder, whether it’s a separate device or built into your coffee maker, will lead to fresher, tastier coffee than relying on pre-ground coffee all the time. So, as far as improving the quality of your coffee goes, a coffee maker with a grinder is certainly a worthwhile purchase. The downside is that they tend to be expensive, especially if they have a burr grinder. It doesn’t mean all hope is lost if a coffee maker with a grinder is out of your budget, though. You can still brew good coffee with pre-ground beans, even if there’s a gap in quality between it and whole bean coffee. You could also purchase a separate coffee grinder for an affordable price; this could be a worthwhile route for people who already have a coffee maker they like and don’t want to buy a whole new brewing device.

                    What is the difference between a blade grinder and a burr grinder?

                    Coffee grinders fall into one of two categories: blade or burr. Blade grinders rely on a spinning metal blade to chop up coffee beans, almost like a blender. They are less consistent than burr grinders and are subsequently much cheaper. Blades can also create a lot of heat when in use, which may alter the flavor of your coffee beans. Burr grinders, on the other hand, are known as the more reliable and higher-quality option. In turn, they are significantly more expensive. There are two kinds of burr grinders, wheel and conical, both of which essentially crush coffee beans to your desired grind size. Conical burrs are considered superior, because they are a little smoother, slower, and quieter than wheel burrs. There are great options for both blade and burr grinders, but try going with the latter if your budget permits.

                    What grind size should I use for my coffee maker?

                    Every coffee maker has its own ideal grind size, ranging from fine to coarse. Machines that work best with fine-ground coffee include Turkish coffee makers, espresso machines, and moka pots. Moving to a medium grind, we have drip coffee makers, pour overs, and the AeroPress. Chemex owners will want to use a medium-coarse grind. Finally, popular devices that use coarse coffee include French presses, percolators, and cold brew makers. Grind size is not always so straightforward, however. Some brewers produce better coffee with slightly finer or coarser grounds than what is listed. It’s worth experimenting on your own to find the perfect grind.

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    When is the best time to grind coffee beans?

                    For best results, grind coffee beans as close to the brewing process as possible. Grinding even a few hours ahead of time, as opposed to a few minutes, will result in a loss of flavor and aroma.

                    If you purchased coffee beans that were recently roasted, however, you should wait a few days to grind them; grinding coffee beans immediately after they’re roasted prevents them from releasing CO2, which alters flavor composition. Optimal freshness can vary based on the type of coffee and brewing method you use, but two to seven days is generally a good range to grind beans after they’re roasted.

                    How much coffee should I use when brewing?

                    There’s a general rule of thumb known as coffee’s Golden Ratio, which is measured in weight rather than volume. The ratio is 1 gram of coffee for every 15 to 18 grams of water. While the best amount of coffee varies a bit depending on the brewing device you use, this is a solid range for most options. Except for espresso, which has a recommended ratio of 1 gram of coffee for every 2 grams of water.

                    If you want to measure coffee in volume rather than weight, try starting with one scoop (2 tablespoons) of coffee for every 6 ounces of water; just know that there may be more variance in the coffee strength.

                    How do I clean a coffee grinder?

                    The process for cleaning a grinder that’s built into a coffee maker is different from cleaning a separate grinder. Sometimes you can’t access a grinder that’s built into a machine. In those instances, consult the item’s instruction manual beforehand. At the very least, you should be able to brush away loose grounds and coffee chaff from the top of the grinder.

                    If you are able to access or completely remove the grinder, the cleaning process will be more thorough. Blade grinders can be wiped with a damp towel, while burr grinders should be cleaned with a dry cloth. Make sure to remove as many loose grounds as possible to ensure better performance and flavor with your next brew.

                    For those who own a separate coffee grinder, the cleaning process once again depends on blade versus burr. One popular way to clean a blade grinder is to fill the device with one-fourth cup of rice and grind until the rice becomes a fine powder. Afterward, empty the rice, and wipe inside the grinder with a wet cloth. This is a handy trick, because rice soaks up leftover coffee oils and residue from previous brews. Burr grinders should be disassembled and scrubbed with a toothbrush or bottle brush. Avoid cleaning burrs with water unless otherwise specified.

                    The Spruce Eats / Russell Kilgore

                    Why Trust The Spruce Eats?

                    This piece was written by Derek Rose, the coffee and tea expert for The Spruce Eats. He researches a variety of coffee products, from measuring scoops to commercial espresso machines, and interviews field experts for their insight. He typically uses non-electric coffee makers at home, alternating between the Bialetti Moka Express and the Bodum Brazil French Press. For this piece, he researched the differences between blade and burr grinders. He also tested the Gevi 10-Cup Drip Coffee Maker, which did not make the list.

                    Sources

                    Paulo Asi is the Director of Training at the Seattle Barista Academy. He has worked in the coffee industry for more than 12 years. Founded in 2013, the Seattle Barista Academy is a multi-dimensional program that trains baristas who are committed to the professional preparation of espresso drinks.

                    The 8 Best Coffee and Espresso Machine Combos of 2023, Tested and Reviewed

                    Types and principle of operation of coffee grinders. Influence on the taste of coffee grinding

                    Types and principle of operation of coffee grinders. Influence on the taste of coffee grinding

                    Grinding coffee is an extremely rough process in general, destroying not only the structure of the coffee bean, but, ultimately, the coffee grinder. Sharply sharpened plates made of forged steel or ceramics with increased fracture toughness, rotating at a speed of 1200 rpm, grind into powder, grind and cut coffee beans. Then the ground particles are thrown away so that they can be turned into a flavored drink. The heat generated can break down the coffee oils and change the fragile flavors of the coffee before it reaches your mug.

                    Factors such as humidity, ambient temperature, roast level and even bean density also play an important role in the calibration of the grinder. In order to better understand exactly how these factors affect the quality of coffee and to make the most of the coffee grinder, you must first understand its design.

                    Knife Grinders

                    There are these kinds of devices on the market today that successfully masquerade as coffee grinders, but are only suitable for making fruit smoothies or powdered sugar. They are almost indistinguishable from ordinary blenders. This is due to the fact that some “experts” consider grinding coffee as a synonym for simply “shredding” the grain into smaller pieces, which always turn out to be of different sizes. Therefore, when brewing coffee, uneven extraction comes out, as well as bitterness and acidity in the drink. We recommend buying coffee already ground on a professional coffee grinder in small portions. This will be a lesser evil than grinding coffee on a knife coffee grinder just before cooking. The best solution is to get yourself a manual or automatic burr (only burr) coffee grinder, which we will discuss below.

                    Typically, such coffee grinders in post-Soviet countries were used to grind sugar into powder and spices. These coffee grinders are not suitable for coffee.

                    Burr grinders

                    These grinders consist of either two tight-fitting rings with rows of slanted teeth, or a cone-shaped cutter fixed in the center of a stationary toothed ring. Burr grinders give a more uniform grinding compared to knife grinders, which, of course, has a positive effect on the quality of extraction. There are both electric and cheaper manual models on the market. The grinders must necessarily be adjustable, since different methods of making coffee require a certain size of grinding beans. So, for use in espresso machines, only fine grinding is used, since a coarser one does not allow you to create the necessary division for making real espresso, just as a French press will not be able to provide high-quality extraction of too fine grinding. Hence, for this method, a large particle size is better suited. Adjustment (or calibration) of the coffee grinder consists in choosing and setting the grinding size that is optimal for a particular method and cooking time, which has a positive effect on the taste of the finished drink.

                    In most models, the bottom grinder is connected directly to the coffee maker’s electric motor, while the top grinder moves vertically and thus adjusts the grind size. Some coffee grinders have a step-by-step adjustment system, meaning the quality and grind size will be set and limited in several successive steps.
                    Stepless adjustment system allows you to set a more precise grinding size. But this does not mean that the step-by-step system gives a lower quality result: in this case, everything depends on the correctly set step and the size of the required grinding. Usually millstones are made of steel or ceramics. Both options are equally good, and the choice of the buyer will depend on how exactly he intends to use the coffee grinder. Ceramic has a lower thermal conductivity, so it will not overheat as quickly as steel. However, it is believed that steel, in turn, dissipates heat faster and, accordingly, cools down. Both materials dull over time, but ceramics are slower, which certainly affects the quality of the grind. I never cease to be amazed at how much the taste of the finished drink increases after simply replacing old millstones with new, sharpened ones.

                    Cone burr rotates at an average speed of 300-500 rpm. This creates a funnel effect, which, not without the intervention of gravity, pulls the coffee beans onto the larger teeth of the millstone, and they “break” the grain into small particles. It doesn’t matter if you’re looking for an extremely fine or coarse grind, these “bends” of steel or ceramic essentially serve the same function. When the grain fragments become small enough, they enter the next stage of the process, where the teeth of the millstones are no longer so large and are intended for the final cutting of ground coffee to the required size. The degree of grinding is ultimately determined by how tightly the cone burr fits against the teeth on the outer ring.

                    Flat burrs consist of two rings with cutting surfaces facing each other. As the lower millstone rotates, centrifugal force spins the grain and directs it against a series of teeth on the outside of the millstone, which grind it to the desired size. Flat millstones differ from conical ones in that they create, rather, the effect of “cutting” individual pieces of grain, rather than “squeezing” it.

                    One of the advantages of coffee grinders with conical burrs is that because the sharpened edges are not parallel to each other, as in flat burrs, they can be adjusted a little more precisely. The distance between the plates of flat burrs is directly related to how they are adjusted vertically, those. if you change their height by 0.5 millimeters, then the gap between them will decrease or increase by the same 0.5 millimeters. Whereas in conical burrs the teeth and grooves are at 60° to each other and their vertical adjustment will have less effect on the distance between the burrs themselves, for example a change of 0. 5. millimeter will move them closer to each other by only 0.25 millimeters. And this is very convenient, because as a result, the accuracy of adjusting the grinding size is increased. However, some modern coffee grinders, regardless of the type of burrs, often have a very complicated calibration system.

                    Burr grinders

                    There are two main types of burrs: flat and conical. There is also a hybrid – flat-conical millstones.

                    Grind uniformity

                    Grind uniformity is determined by how uniform (or different) the particles of a particular batch of ground coffee are. The different size of coffee granules means that all processes in it and with it will proceed at different speeds. And the general rule is that doubling the grain size quadruples the extraction rate. If you boil a quail, chicken and ostrich egg in the same pan for three minutes, then the quail will be overcooked, the ostrich will be undercooked, and the chicken will be just right. The same principle applies to making beverages with different grinds of coffee.

                    The more heterogeneous the coffee, the worse: the smallest particles (“powdered”) will be over-extracted, while the larger ones (“coarse”) will be under-extracted. In an ideal world, all ground coffee particles would weigh the same and have the same surface area. Specialty coffee producers are constantly arguing about the importance of grind uniformity, and coffee grinder manufacturers are constantly working to improve existing and find new ways to grind coffee.

                    In fact, the main problem is the grain, namely its fragility. When the blades of the millstones cut off a piece of grain, many tiny fragments fly off with it. It is impossible to avoid this, and the darker the roast, the easier the grain will crumble. This “coffee dust” can end up in your drink and ruin the whole experience. Most coffee grinders are designed in such a way that the percentage of these particles does not exceed 10% of the total weight of the coffee batch. In many ways, they are the cause of poor liquid filtration, uneven extraction and low body density in espresso. In addition, they lead to over-extraction and the appearance of sediment when coffee is prepared, for example, in a French press. In addition, they can clog the pores and openings of coffee filters.

                    Grinding may result in larger particles remaining in ground coffee than originally thought. Why this happens is not entirely clear, since theoretically the distance between the grinders should prevent them from entering the final product. I believe that the grinding process is inherently so intense that even too large particles are forced out and pushed out through such cracks and holes through which they would never have leaked under normal circumstances.

                    In the long run, the best grinders and the best burrs produce a more uniform grind and somewhat limit the amount of “coffee chips”. The key to success is the sharply ground blades of the millstones, which guarantee you that the grain will be cut and ground properly, and at the same time a minimum amount of heat will be generated. Currently, the model coffee grinder on the market is Mahlkonig’s EK43, priced at around £2,400-$3,750. It is equipped with a unique set of millstones that result in, if not perfect, then at least the closest to perfect result to date. Don’t cry at the price you see. To make coffee at home and get a satisfactory result, a quality manual or electric burr grinder for $50-250 will suffice.

                    Take a closer look: the grinding is not uniform. Never use these grinders for coffee.

                    Grind size

                    The finer the grind, the greater the surface area of ​​the ground coffee and the faster the extraction, as the liquid will have an easier time reaching the aroma and flavor elements contained in the coffee.

                    In a process where liquid is forced through the coffee bed by gravity, the surface area of ​​the ground beans must be large enough. First of all, because at the moment of passage, the liquid is in direct contact with the ground coffee for an extremely limited time. Extraction occurs as it seeps through it. In addition, finer ground coffee provides a kind of barrier of the required density, delaying the seepage of liquid and, thus, eliminating underextraction. In other words, a finer grind speeds up extraction and extends extraction time. In turn, a coarser grind means that the liquid will quickly pass through the ground coffee bed, and the extraction rate will be lower. In order to achieve the optimal balance, it is necessary to correctly calibrate the grinder to obtain such a grind, which will ensure the correct contact time of the liquid with the coffee.

                    For example, when making coffee in a French press, the grind size will only affect the degree and speed of extraction, since the contact time of the liquid with the coffee is set directly by the brewer using the piston. If you use an excessively fine grind, then the French press filter will clog, and the preparation of a quality drink will not work.
                    One of the main problems in the specialty coffee industry is the difficulty of translation and the different names used in different countries for the same degree of grinding. Perhaps the grind is the key variable in the perfect coffee equation, and yet I can’t explain to you how coarse or fine the grind should be for your drink. It is impossible even to compare two identical models of coffee grinders, because the slightest difference in its design or assembly can affect the quality and size of the grind. In a properly equipped laboratory, it is of course possible to accurately measure the particle size (in microns) and the corresponding difference between samples, but this option is not available to us.

                    In connection with the above, we must understand that the grinding size for a particular method has a very vague recommendation. But the situation is extremely important. The only solution is an experiment based on recommendations and understanding of the effect of grind size on extraction.

                    Copying of material is allowed only with a hyperlink to the source: www.barista.ua

                    Should you open a coffee shop?

                    Fiorenzato coffee grinders: description, models and specifications

                    PROFESSIONAL COFFEE GRINDER

                    April 2, 2020

                    All fans of this fragrant and invigorating drink probably know that the most delicious coffee comes from freshly ground beans. A professional coffee grinder is the perfect solution for those who brew coffee frequently and in large quantities. Such a device is designed for sufficiently large loads and long-term operation. In any cafe, bar or restaurant, professional coffee grinders are also used. Find out what coffee grinders are, how they differ from household ones, the device and the rules for their maintenance.

                    DIFFERENCES between PROFESSIONAL AND HOUSEHOLD COFFEE GRINDERS:

                    • Longer resource
                    • High-quality grinding
                    • More precise grinding adjustment (changes the distance between the millstones)
                    • Grinding uniform, granules of approximately the same shape
                    • Professional grinders not only grind, but also dispense ground coffee in portions.

                    TYPES OF PROFESSIONAL COFFEE GRINDERS:

                    Parallel grinders

                    Cone grinders

                    Suitable for low traffic establishments

                    Suitable for high traffic establishments

                    Economical, low productivity

                    3-9 kg per hour

                    Expensive, high performance

                    20-73 kg per hour

                    Small work surface – flat burrs with a diameter of 64-80mm, arranged in parallel

                    Large work surface – burrs, conical shape 49-120mm diameter, nested one inside the other

                    High speed (900-1400 rpm)

                    Low rpm(400-600)

                    Danger of “burning” the coffee from friction during prolonged use

                    Coffee does not “burn through”

                    Resource for 300-600 kg of coffee

                    Resource for 800-1200 kg of coffee

                    COFFEE GRINDER

                    SERVICE REGULATIONS:

                    * For more information, see the manufacturer’s instruction manual. General recommendations for the maintenance of the coffee grinder are given.

                    Getting Started:

                    1. Load fresh grain into the grain hopper.

                    2. Grind a few burr cleaners and discard.

                    3. Empty the ground coffee hopper.

                    4. Set the desired grind.

                    During operation:

                    1. Ensure that there is enough ground coffee in the hopper for operation.

                    2. Do not pour ground coffee into the bean hopper, otherwise the burrs will clog.

                    3. Do not allow the coffee grinder to run for a long time with plane-parallel burrs, so that the coffee is not burnt by friction (burnt, smoky smell, bitter astringent taste).

                    At the end of work:

                    1. Empty the bean hopper by placing the residue in a sealed bag.

                    2. Grind the grains inside the grinder.

                    3. Empty the ground coffee hopper by discarding the residue.

                    4. Clean the dispenser with a dry brush or brush.

                    5. Periodic work and checks:

                    6.

    Husqvarna rider 16: Husqvarna Ride Mower | Rider 16

    Опубликовано: April 13, 2023 в 4:36 pm

    Автор:

    Категории: Miscellaneous

    Husqvarna R 320X AWD Rider | Husqvarna MY

    Malaysia

    CameroonCôte d’IvoireEgyptEquatorial GuineaEswatiniGambiaGhanaGuinea BissauIsrael (en) Israel (he)KenyaKuwaitLebanon (ar)Lebanon (en)LiberiaMozambiqueOman (ar)Oman (en)Qatar (ar)Qatar (en)Saudi Arabia (ar)Saudi Arabia (en)SenegalSeychellesSouth AfricaTanzaniaTunisiaTurkeyUgandaUnited Arab Emirates (ar)United Arab Emirates (en)ZambiaZimbabwe

    AustraliaAzerbaijanMainland ChinaFijiFrench PolynesiaHong KongIndiaIndonesiaJapanKazakhstanMalaysiaNew CaledoniaNew ZealandPapua New GuineaThe PhilippinesSingaporeSouth KoreaTaiwanThailandTurkmenistanUzbekistanVanuatuVietnam

    AlbaniaAustriaBelarusBelgium (fr)Belgium (nl)Bosnia and HerzegovinaBulgariaCyprusCroatiaCzech RepublicDenmarkEstoniaFinland (fi)Finland (sv)FranceGeorgiaGermanyGreeceHungaryIcelandIrelandItalyLatviaLithuaniaLuxembourg (de)Luxembourg (fr)MoldovaMontenegroNetherlandsNorth MacedoniaNorwayPolandPortugalRomaniaRussiaSerbiaSlovakiaSloveniaSpainSwedenSwitzerland (de)Switzerland (fr)Switzerland (it)TurkeyUkraineUnited Kingdom

    ArgentinaBoliviaBrazilChileColombiaCosta RicaDominican RepublicEcuadorGuatemalaMexicoNicaraguaRepublic of PanamaParaguayPeruUruguay

    Canada (en)Canada (fr)MexicoUSA

    Residential Ride-On Front Mowers

    HUSQVARNA R 320X AWD – 967 84 73‑01

    Not included
    • Cutting deck

    Product Description

    Highly agile and flexible All-Wheel-Drive Rider with easy-access controls, Turn Key Start, dual LED-lights, a softgrip steering wheel with knob. Optional 94, 103 or 112cm Combi cutting decks offering first-class BioClip® (mulching) and rear ejection cutting. Numerous attachments for a wide range of jobs. Equipped with an intuitive display, dual headlights and Bluetooth connectivity with which you easily monitor your rider with the Husqvarna Connect app.

    Product Information

    R 320AWD 2019-

    Art no: 967 84 73‑01

    Engine

    R 320AWD 2019-

    Art no: 967 84 73‑01

    Power/fuel type Gasoline
    Net power at preset rpm Energy 10.5 kW
    Motor/engine manufacturer Briggs & Stratton
    Engine name Endurance Series
    Cylinder displacement 500 cm³
    Cylinders 1
    Engine cooling Air
    Engine lubrication type Full pressure
    Oil filter Yes
    Emission

    Exhaust emissions (CO2 EU V)

    794 g/kWh
    Battery
    Battery capacity 24 Ah
    Battery type Lead-Acid
    Battery pack weight 7. 2 kg
    Battery manufacturer Global
    Cutting deck
    Uncut circle 30 cm
    Cutting width, min 94 cm
    Cutting width, max 112 cm
    Cutting height min 25 mm
    Cutting height max 75 mm
    Blade engagement Automatic
    Dimensions
    Tyre dimensions, front 170/60-8
    Tyre dimensions, rear 170/60-8
    Wheelbase 88.7 cm
    Ground clearance 85 mm
    Base machine, length 202 cm
    Base machine, width 89 cm
    Base machine, height 115 cm

    Gross weight towed

    125 kg
    Drive system
    PTO (Power Take Off) Belt Drive
    Transmission type Hydrostatic
    Transmission manufacturer, rear Tuff Torq
    Drive method Dual pedal-operation
    Speed forward max 9 km/h
    Speed reverse max 5. 6 mph
    Speed reverse max 9 km/h
    Transmission manufacturer, front Tuff Torq
    Transmission model, front KTM10LB
    Transmission model, rear K574A
    Equipment
    Seat suspension Yes
    Hour meter type Digital with pre-programmed service intervals
    Seat material PU
    Seat back height Medium
    Foldable seat Yes
    Steering wheel type Comfort
    Parking brake, type Disc
    Vibration
    Vibration level steering wheel 2.5 m/s²
    Vibration level seat 0.7 m/s²
    Sound and Noise
    Sound pressure level at operators ear 84 dB(A)
    Sound power level, guaranteed (LWA) 99 dB(A)
    Sound power level, measured 98 dB(A)


    Also view

    Related content

    How-To’s & Guides

    How to renovate your lawn and fix patchy grass

    How-To’s & Guides

    How to water your lawn

    Buying Advice

    Things to consider when buying a new ride-on mower

    How-To’s & Guides

    How to mulch grass and leaves

    How-To’s & Guides

    How to start your Husqvarna ride-on front mower

    Products & Innovations

    Lawn mowing with Husqvarna

    How-To’s & Guides

    How to mount a cutting deck on your Husqvarna ride-on front mower

    How-To’s & Guides

    Creating the perfect pitch

    Showing 8 of 8

    HUSQVARNA RIDER 16 OPERATOR’S MANUAL Pdf Download

    Download

    Table of Contents

    Add to my manuals

    Bookmark this page

    Manual will be automatically added to “My Manuals”

    Print this page

    Table Of Contents

    2

    • page

      of
      51

    • Contents

    • Table of Contents

    • Troubleshooting

    • Bookmarks

    Table of Contents

    • Table of Contents

    • General Operation

    • Slope Operation

    • III. Children

    • Safety Rules for Usa

    • Safety Instructions

      • IV. Service

    • Introduction

      • Driving and Transport on Public Roads

      • Towing

      • Serial Number

    • Explanation of Symbols

    • Safety Instructions

      • General Use

      • Driving on Slopes

      • Children

      • Maintenance

    • Presentation

      • Location of the Controls

      • Throttle/Choke Lever

      • Speed Limiter

      • Parking Brake

      • Cutting Unit

      • Lift Lever for Cutting Unit

      • Lever for Adjustment of Cutting Height

      • Fuelling

    • Driving

      • Before Starting

      • Starting the Engine

      • Driving the Machine

      • Cutting Tips

      • Stopping the Engine

      • Release Lever

    • Maintenance

      • Maintenance Schedule

      • Dismantling of the Machine Hoods

      • Checking and Adjusting the Steering Wires

      • Adjusting the Brake

      • Checking and Adjustment of Throttle Wire

      • Replacement of the Fuel Filter

      • Replacement of Air Filter

      • Replacing the Air Filter

      • Checking the Fuel Pump’s Air Filter

      • Checking the Battery Acid Level

      • Checking the Safety System

      • Checking the Tyre Pressure

      • Checking the Engine’s Cooling Air Intake

      • Fitting the Cutting Unit

      • Installing Bioclip 90

      • Checking and Adjustment of Cutting Unit’s Ground Pressure

      • Checking the Parallelism of the Cutting Unit

      • Adjusting the Parallelism of the Cutting Unit

      • Dismantling the Cutting Unit

      • Replacing the Cutting Unit Belts
      • Service Position for Cutting Unit

      • Checking the Blades

      • Replacing the Break-Pin (Bioclip)

    • Lubrication

      • Checking the Engine’s Oil Level

      • Changing the Oil

      • Checking the Transmission’s Oil Level

      • Lubricating the Belt Adjuster

      • General Lubrication

    • Trouble Shooting Schedule

    • Storage

      • Winter Storage

      • Service

    • Technical Data

    Advertisement

    Rider 16

    Operator´s manual

    Please read these instructions carefully and make sure

    you understand them before using the machine.

    101 91 33-95

    Table of Contents

    Previous Page

    Next Page

    Table of Contents

    Summary of Contents for Husqvarna Rider 16

    Rider Husqvarna R316Ts AWD | Husqvarna BY

    Belarus

    CameroonCôte d’IvoireEgyptEquatorial GuineaEswatiniGambiaGhanaGuinea BissauIsrael (en) Israel (he)KenyaKuwaitLebanon (ar)Lebanon (en)LiberiaMozambiqueOman (ar)Oman (en)Qatar (ar )Qatar (en)Saudi Arabia (ar)Saudi Arabia (en)SenegalSeychellesSouth AfricaTanzaniaTunisiaTurkeyUgandaUnited Arab Emirates (ar)United Arab Emirates (en)ZambiaZimbabwe

    AustraliaAzerbaijanMainland ChinaFijiFrench PolynesiaHong KongIndiaIndonesiaJapanKazakhstanMalaysiaNew CaledoniaNew ZealandPapua New Guinea PhilippinesTheSingaporeSouth KoreaTaiwan ThailandTurkmenistanUzbekistanVanuatuVietnam

    AlbaniaAustriaBelarusBelgium (fr)Belgium (nl)Bosnia and HerzegovinaBulgariaCyprusCroatiaCzech RepublicDenmarkEstoniaFinland (fi)Finland (sv)FranceGeorgiaGermanyGreeceHungaryIcelandIrelandItalyLatviaLithuaniaLuxembourg (de)Luxembourg ( fr)MoldovaMontenegroNetherlandsNorth MacedoniaNorwayPolandPortugalRomaniaRussiaSerbiaSlovakiaSloveniaSpainSwedenSwitzerland (de)Switzerland (fr)Switzerland (it)TurkeyUkraineUnited Kingdom

    ArgentinaBoliviaBrazilChileColombiaCosta RicaDominican RepublicEcuadorGuatemalaMexicoNicaragua Republic of PanamaParaguayPeruUruguay

    Canada (en)Canada (fr)MexicoUSA

    Front Deck Riders for Private Use

    HUSQVARNA R316Ts AWD Rider – 967 29 18‑01

    Not included
    • Cutting deck

    Product description

    Powerful and versatile rider with twin cylinder engine and all wheel drive. Possibility to install a combined cutting deck, cutting width of 94 cm, 103 cm or 112 cm (cutting decks not included). The combi cutting deck combines two mowing modes: BioClip® (mulching) and rear ejection mode. This model is an excellent choice for owners of large plots, sports clubs or hotels with professional requirements for power, comfort and performance all year round. Improved ease of control of cutting decks and attachments. The all-wheel drive system provides traction on uneven, wet and slippery surfaces and slopes, automatically adjusts traction on all wheels according to the situation and surface conditions. An excellent combination of technical solutions ensures flawless results. Easily swap cutting decks for attachments – brushes, snow plow, snow thrower – for maximum productivity all year round. Pedal-operated hydrostatic transmission improves mowing comfort. The cutting deck can be easily adjusted to the service position for easy cleaning and maintenance.

    Item information

    90 036

    9 0057 Machine overall height

    90 043

    90 057 Seat suspension
    No.

    : 967 29 18-01

    Motor

    967291801

    Art. no: 967 29 18‑01

    Fuel type Gasoline
    Rated power at operating speed 9.6 kW
    Engine manufacturer Kawasaki
    Engine Model FS V-Twin Series
    Cylinder Displacement, cc cm 603 cm³
    Cylinders 2
    Engine cooling system Air
    Engine lubrication type Constant pressure
    Oil filter Yes
    Battery
    Battery capacity 24 Ah
    Battery Type Lead Acid
    Battery Pack Weight 7.2 kg
    Battery manufacturer Global
    Cutting deck
    Diameter 30 cm
    Cutting width, min. -max. 94 cm
    Maximum cutting width 112 cm
    Minimum cutting height 25 mm
    Maximum cutting height 75 mm
    Blade engagement clutch 900 42

    Automatic
    Size
    Front tire size 170/60 -8
    Rear tire size 170/60-8
    Wheelbase 88.7 cm
    CLI rens 85 mm
    Machine overall length 202 cm
    Machine overall width 89 cm
    115 cm
    Gross weight 315 ​​kg

    Gross weight towed

    125 kg
    Drive system
    PTO (Power Take Off) Belt Drive
    Transmission type Hydrostatic
    Transmission Dual pedal-operation
    Maximum forward speed 9 km/h 9 0048
    Reverse speed, min. -max. max 5.6 miles/rear
    Maximum reverse speed 9 km/rear
    Equipment
    Yes
    Hour meter Digital with programmed service intervals
    Seat material Vinyl
    Seat back height High
    Folding vision Yes
    Steering wheel type Comfort
    Park brake type Disc type
    Vibration
    Steering wheel vibration 2.5 m/s²
    Seat vibration 0.7 m/s²
    Sound and noise level
    Sound pressure at operator’s ear 83 dB(A)
    Noise level 98 dB(A)
    Noise measurement 97 dB(A)

    Instruction manuals

    OM. Husqvarna. R 316T, R 316T AWD, R 316Ts AWD, R 316TXs AWD. 2016-01

    OM. Husqvarna. R 316T, R 316T AWD, R 316Ts AWD, R 316TXs AWD. 2012-01

    See also

    Related information

    Shopping advice

    What to look for when buying a rider

    Practical advice

    Mulching grass and leaves

    Practical advice

    How to install and remove the cabin on the Husqvarna P500

    Practical advice

    How to start a Husqvarna front deck 9 rider0019

    Reviews

    Why are gardening companies switching to Husqvarna equipment?

    Products and innovations

    Learn more about the new Husqvarna P 535HX

    How-To

    How to install a cutting deck on a Husqvarna

    rider

    How-to

    Creating the perfect sports turf

    Practical Tips

    How to Water Your Lawn Properly

    Practical Tips recommendations

    How to install a cutting deck on a Husqvarna professional rider

    Showing 10 of 11

    Rider Husqvarna R316T | Husqvarna BY

    Belarus

    CameroonCôte d’IvoireEgyptEquatorial GuineaEswatiniGambiaGhanaGuinea BissauIsrael (en) Israel (he)KenyaKuwaitLebanon (ar)Lebanon (en)LiberiaMozambiqueOman (ar)Oman (en)Qatar (ar )Qatar (en)Saudi Arabia (ar)Saudi Arabia (en)SenegalSeychellesSouth AfricaTanzaniaTunisiaTurkeyUgandaUnited Arab Emirates (ar)United Arab Emirates (en)ZambiaZimbabwe

    AustraliaAzerbaijanMainland ChinaFijiFrench PolynesiaHong KongIndiaIndonesiaJapanKazakhstanMalaysiaNew CaledoniaNew ZealandPapua New GuineaThe PhilippinesSingaporeSouth KoreaTaiwanThailandTurkmenistanUzbekistanVanuatuVietnam

    AlbaniaAustriaBelarusBelgium (fr)B elgium (nl)Bosnia and HerzegovinaBulgariaCyprusCroatiaCzech RepublicDenmarkEstoniaFinland (fi)Finland (sv)FranceGeorgiaGermanyGreeceHungaryIcelandIrelandItalyLatviaLithuaniaLuxembourg (de)Luxembourg (fr)MoldovaMontenegroNetherlandsNorth MacedoniaNorwayPolandPortugalRomaniaRussia SerbiaSlovakiaSloveniaSpainSwedenSwitzerland (de)Switzerland (fr) Switzerland (it)TurkeyUkraineUnited Kingdom

    ArgentinaBoliviaBrazilChileColombiaCosta RicaDominican RepublicEcuadorGuatemalaMexicoNicaraguaRepublic of PanamaParaguayPeruUruguay

    Canada (en)Canada (fr)MexicoUSA

    Front deck riders for private use

    900 02 Rider HUSQVARNA R316T – 967 29 16‑01

    Not included
    • Cutting deck

    Item description

    Powerful and versatile twin-cylinder rider with 9 mounting options4, 103 or 112 cm Combi cutting decks (cutting decks not included), with rear cut grass ejection or BioClip® mulching. Designed for those who appreciate the highest efficiency, agility and amazing results all year round. The “breaking frame” system and front-mounted cutting deck provide intuitive control, excellent driving characteristics and great job satisfaction. In summary, this rider will provide you with an extraordinary driving experience! Allows easy attachment of additional attachments such as brushes, snow bucket or snow thrower for maximum results all year round. Features like pedal-operated hydrostatic transmission, easy-to-reach controls, lights and cutting deck service position make driving and maintaining this rider a pleasure.

    Product information

    9003 6

    Kawasaki FS481V, hydraulic transmission, decks – accessory

    Art. No.: 967 29 16‑01

    Engine

    Kawasaki FS481V, hydraulic transmission, decks – accessory

    Art. No.: 967 29 16‑01

    Fuel type Gasoline
    Rated power at operating speed 9, 6 kW
    The manufacturer of the engine Kawasaki
    Engine model series FS V-Twin
    Operating volume of the cylinder, cubic meters. cm 603 cm³
    Cylinders 2
    Engine cooling system Air
    Engine lubrication type Constant pressure
    Oil filter Yes
    Battery
    Battery capacity 24 Ah
    Battery type Lead acid
    Battery pack weight 7.2 kg
    Battery manufacturer Global
    Cutting deck
    Uncut circle diameter 30 cm
    Cutting width, min.-max. 94 cm
    Maximum cutting width 112 cm
    Minimum cutting height 25 mm
    Maximum cutting height 75 mm
    Knife clutch Automatic
    Dimensions
    Front tire size 170/60-8
    Rear tire size 170/60-8
    Wheelbase 88. 7 cm
    Ground clearance 105 mm 0047 202 cm
    Machine overall width 89 cm
    Machine overall height 115 cm
    Gross weight towed

    125 kg 9004 8
    Drive system
    PTO (Power Take Off) Belt Drive
    Transmission Type Hydrostatic
    Transmission Dual pedal-operation
    Maximum forward speed 9 km/gadz
    Reverse speed, min.-max. max 5.6 miles/hadz
    Maximum reverse speed 9 km/hadz
    Equipment
    Seat suspension Yes
    Hour meter Digital with programmed service intervals 90 048
    Seat material PU
    Seat back height High
    Folding vision Yes
    Steering wheel type Comfort
    Parking brake type Disc type
    Vibration
    Steering wheel vibration 2.

    Refill ink for printer: Printer Ink Refill : Target

    Опубликовано: April 12, 2023 в 4:36 pm

    Автор:

    Категории: Miscellaneous

    How to refill ink cartridge

    Article last updated March 7, 2023

    This blog post will teach you how to refill your own printer cartridges to save money. Though most printer manufacturers do not recommend refilling most cartridges, there are reputable companies that sell printer ink refill kits that work just as well as replacement cartridges.

    1. Purchase a printer ink refill kit.

    These kits are available at many office supply, discount, and department stores for a fraction of the price of an official replacement cartridge. Kits typically include ink, a syringe, seal covers, a manual, and a screw tool, as well as everything you need to refill an existing cartridge.

    Some ink refill kits are universal, which means they are designed to work with any inkjet printer brand. Others are model- or manufacturer-specific.

    Most printer manufacturers recommend against refilling your own printer ink. Instead, they advise you to buy new cartridges from them directly. Refilling your own cartridges may preclude you from receiving tech support from the printer manufacturer, so do so at your own risk.

    2. Set up your workspace.

    Because ink can be messy, place some newspaper or paper towels on a flat work surface. Then gather your ink kit, additional paper towels, a pair of gloves you don’t mind getting dirty, and some clear tape.

    Printer ink will stain clothing and surfaces permanently. Protect your hands by putting on gloves. Though ink stains on your skin are not permanent, they can last for a long time.

    3. Take the printer cartridge out.

    The steps vary depending on the printer, but the cartridges are usually not difficult to remove. Turning on the printer may be necessary to move the cartridges to a more accessible location.

    Check your printer’s manual for the exact location of the cartridges and removal instructions.

    4. Place the empty cartridge on a paper towel that has been folded.

    To make an effective spill guard, fold the paper towel in half twice.

    5. Read the instruction manual for the refill kit.

    The manual will include kit-specific instructions, as well as information on how to use the included tools. If the manual’s instructions differ significantly from those in this article, follow them.

    6. Locate the cartridge’s ink fill hole.

    Some cartridges, such as those manufactured by HP, already have a fill hole, eliminating the need to puncture the cartridge.

    To find potential fill holes, peel back the label from the top of the cartridge. When using a cartridge with multiple inks in a single unit, each color will have its own fill hole.

    If you find multiple holes, only one leads to the ink reservoir. Examine each hole until you find one that has a spongy material inside it—this is the fill hole. You can test this by attempting to remove some existing ink with the included syringe.

    Some manufacturers include a twist-off cap on each cartridge that must be removed in order to access the fill hole.

    If the fill hole is sealed, simply break the seal to fill it.

    7. In the absence of a fill hole, make one.

    If the cartridge does not have a fill hole (or if the hole is covered by a seal), you will need to puncture the plastic to make one. The best way to do this is to pierce the top side of the cartridge with the screw tool or drill bit that came with your kit.

    If your kit did not include a puncture tool, use a pen, toothpick, knife, or screwdriver instead. If you’re filling a single multicolor cartridge, you’ll need to repeat this process for each color.

    Make sure to follow any instructions in the kit that describe how to make and place the holes properly.

    8. Fill the syringe halfway with ink.

    Begin by pushing the plunger of the syringe all the way in. Insert the long end of the replacement ink bottle into the chamber and slowly pull the plunger away to fill it with ink.

    9. Slowly pour ink into the cartridge.

    Insert the long end of the syringe into the cartridge’s fill hole until you reach the spongy bottom. Then, slowly lower the plunger to add ink. Push slowly to avoid adding air bubbles, which can cause the cartridge to break.

    10. When a little ink oozes out of the hole, stop adding more.

    This means you’ve made it to the top. Pull the plunger slightly outward to suck out some of the excess ink, then remove the syringe from the fill hole.

    With a paper towel, clean the area around the fill hole. Before you plug it up, make sure it’s clean and dry.

    11. Use a small piece of tape to cover the hole.

    If your kit included a seal/stopper that fits into the hole, insert it now. However, tape can sometimes create a better seal. Once sealed, blot the top of the cartridge several times with a folded paper towel to remove any excess ink.

    12. Fill in the remaining colors.

    If your kit includes multiple syringes, use a different one for each color to avoid mixing them together. If not, wash and dry your syringe thoroughly between colors. Blot any excess ink from each cartridge before reinstalling it in the printer.

    13. Replacing the cartridge, print a test page.

    To get the ink flowing, print something. If you refill more than one color, print something in both full-color and black-and-white to ensure that all of the ink is properly printed. You may need to print a few test pages to ensure that everything is working properly.

    How to Refill Ink Cartridges? Printer Ink Refill Step-by-Step Guide

    If you’re like most printer users, you probably don’t think about refilling your ink cartridge very often. You may not even know that there’s a way to do printer ink refills and that too, 3-4 times before buying new cartridges.

    So you see, refilling your ink cartridge can save you a lot of money in the long run. This guide is all you need to learn how to refill ink cartridges and more. Let’s get started:

    Printer Ink Refill Tools

    To start, you need to gather the necessary supplies to begin the printer cartridge refill. For a hassle-free ink refill process, prepare the following tools:

    • Universal Ink Refilling Kit
    • Syringe
    • Ink Bottles
    • Paper Towels/Old Newspapers
    • Gloves
    • Clear Tape
    • Toothpick

    Can I Refill My Ink Cartridge? – Complete Procedure

    You can absolutely refill your ink cartridge! Although, there are refilling stations where you can have your printer with refillable ink filled, but why spend money on them when you can DIY? Using a refill syringe allows you to refill your cartridge at home without spending anything.

    All that’s required is some small learning curve involving injecting ink into the cartridge via a syringe. Once you’re familiar with the process, refilling cartridges becomes simple and easy! This guide will give you a complete walk-through on how to refill ink cartridges. So let’s start:

    Step 1 – Prepare the Refilling Site

    Printer ink refill can be a little messy, especially if this is your first time doing it. Since the printer ink is permanent, it can leave non-removable stains on your clothes and the surface. So wear old clothes and prepare the area by placing some tissue paper or newspaper on the surface. Also, wear some gloves so that the ink does not spill on your hands. Although the stain won’t be permanent, it can stay there for a very long time.

    Step 2 – Remove Your Cartridge

    Second step to refill printer ink is removing your cartridge from the machine. It’s not difficult to remove the cartridge from the printer, even though it varies from printer to printer. Check the printer’s manual to see how it’s done for your specific model.

    Step 3 – Read Printer Ink Refill Kit’s Instructions

    Most ink cartridge refill kits, like the one CompAndSave sells, come with an instruction manual for cartridge refilling. This makes it easy to get the filling right the first time. You can read the CompAndSave Universal Refill Kit’s Manual for a step-by-step process breakdown.

    Step 4 – Find the Filling Hole

    The first thing to know where to refill ink cartridges is to find the fill hole. If you see the refilling inkjet cartridge instruction PDF, we linked above. You’ll see it shows different fill holes for different colors, so depending on your cartridge type, you can fill in that particular hole.

    Although some cartridges have their fill holes visible, like the ones made by HP, some do not. For instance, some cartridges have insertion points located on top, like the Canon BCI-3e. Similarly, some cartridges have air vents instead of holes, like the Dell T0529. So if you want to know how to refill printer ink cartridges for your exact cartridge model, make sure to check out this detailed PDF .

    Moreover, if your refillable ink cartridges don’t have a clear, visible hole, peel the label at the top of the cartridge to find potential areas for filling holes. If you have a cartridge with multiple colors, you will see each color separately; the universal kit instruction manual should also highlight them. Some manufacturers also put twist caps onto the cartridges that should be removed to reveal fill hole(s).

    If there are multiple holes for a single color, only one of them will lead to the reservoir. Find it by looking for a hole with spongy material. Lastly, if the fill hole is sealed, you will have to drill into it to make space for the syringe to go inside. You can use the drill bit or screw tool that comes with the Universal Refill Kit to puncture the seal. If there’s none, use a toothpick to do it.

    Step 5 – Fill The Syringe

    Now take the syringe that came with the refill kit, insert it into the ink bottle that also came with it, and start filling. Depending on the refillable printer ink cartridge size, you need to fill specific amounts. You can check the model of your cartridge online to find out how much ink goes into each hole. Or, you can just start with 3-4 ml in the syringe, come back and refill the syringe, and go as needed.

    Step 6 – Add Ink To the Cartridge

    For the sixth step on how to refill printer ink cartridges, take the syringe needle slowly out of the ink bottle and insert it carefully into the cartridge hole. Make sure to push the plunger down gently to avoid air bubbles.

    Also, you can stop when the ink starts oozing out of the hole. That’s when you’ve reached the top. Now just pull the plunger a little to suck extra ink out, so the cartridge is not overfilled, and you’re good to go.

    Step 7 – Clean and Cover

    Once the cartridge’s holes are filled and you’ve set the syringe aside, take a paper towel and wipe the top of the cartridge to ensure no ink traces are left. When plugging it back into the printer, you do not want this area to get wet.

    To continue with the printer cartridge refill properly, put some clear scotch tape over the holes to seal the ink from coming out when the cartridge is inside the printer.

    Step 8 – Test Print

    The last step on how to fill ink in cartridge is to pop the cartridge back into the printer and test print some pages to get those colored juices flowing inside the cartridge. Print all the colors to ensure every one of them is working properly.


    Mistakes to Avoid When Refilling Ink Cartridges

    When it comes to refilling ink cartridges, there are a few things to keep in mind. Here are some crucial mistakes to avoid during printer ink refill:

    1. Refilling Ink Fast

    Refilling printer ink can be a tedious and time-consuming process – that’s why it’s important to take the right steps on how to refill ink cartridge. Remember these simple tips to refill your ink cartridge swiftly and without any issues:

    • Always refill cartridges slowly and carefully, as going too fast can cause them to clog or spill ink.
    • Use a steady, slow injection motion when refilling the cartridge, so you don’t experience any problems with clogging or spills.
    • Do not overfill the cartridge – this will result in poor printing quality and an overflow situation, potentially damaging the printer itself.

    2. Waiting to Refill After the Cartridge is Dried Out

    It’s important to refill your cartridge as soon as your ink is low so that the sponge remains moist and you don’t have to deal with a problematic ink refilling process. Waiting too long can cause the cartridge to become empty, resulting in the sponge drying out. Dried ink cartridge makes refilling a challenging task at best – often requiring user manual dexterity.

    3. Incorrectly Injecting the Ink

    Incorrectly injecting ink into a printer can lead to serious printing problems. This is because the ink will not be evenly distributed, and your pages will end up with uneven shades. As a result, you’ll see blurry printouts with visible smudging. So do not inject all the ink in one location during cartridge refilling. Rotate a few times.

    4. Not Cleaning Refill Syringes

    It’s important to keep your syringe clean before refilling it with new ink. Not cleaning the syringe will mean that the new colors of ink will mix with the old leftovers in the syringe, changing the shades of color on printouts. It is best to clean the syringe with rubbing alcohol before you refill printer ink and then rinse it thoroughly.

    5. Not Waiting After Refilling

    After an ink cartridge refill, it’s always best to give your printer ink some time to settle in the cartridge before printing. This will ensure that the ink cartridge prints with good quality, free from blotches or other irregularities.


    Printer Ink Cartridge Refill Tips

    Now that you know almost everything you should and shouldn’t do when refilling ink cartridges, it’s time to learn some “good to know” details. These tips will help you have a better ink refilling experience.

    1. Get a Refilling Kit

    When it comes to refilling ink cartridges, there are a variety of options available on the market. However, choosing the universal refilling kit is important so you can refill most inkjet cartridges. This will ensure that no matter which printer you buy in the future, you can fill its ink cartridge.

    2. Cleaning Up Ink Stains From Hands

    The first time you refill cartridges, chances are, you will get some stains on your hands, no matter how prudent you try to be. So if you get some, don’t freak out. There’s an easy solution to this.

    Make a mild bleach and water solution. Take a clean rag, dip it into the solution, and start gently rubbing it on the stained area. This will take the ink off your hands. Once done, just use soap to wash your hands.

    3. Equalizing the Pressure

    When you inject ink inside the cartridge, this upsets its internal pressure. So when you’re done ink refilling, set the cartridge on some paper towels for 15 minutes before inserting it back into the printer. This will ensure the internal pressure is stabilized and any excess ink is also drained off.

    4. Storing Refilled Cartridges

    If you have extra cartridges that you want to refill and keep for later use, then store them properly. Keep your ink cartridges in a cool, dark place. Don’t keep them near heat or direct sunlight. Also, store them in a container with a desiccant to absorb moisture. This will prevent the ink from drying out and clogging the print head.

    5. Maintaining Safety

    Keeping your printer and ink cartridges safe is of the utmost importance. Always refill them in a safe place – away from flames and other sparks. And always work in a properly ventilated area to avoid inhaling toxic ink fumes.

    Index

    Related articles:

    Need Help?

    Our customer support is available from Mon-Fri, 6am-4pm PT

      1-833-465-6888

      Live Chat

    Cartridge refill at home

    1. Home
    2. Articles
    3. Cartridge refill at home

    02. 11.2020

    According to the existing so-called law of meanness, ink in an inkjet printer cartridge can often run out at the most crucial moment. In those situations when it is impossible to get to the maintenance service, but you urgently need to print a lot of papers for reports, or you just want to save money, the question arises of self-filling printer cartridges.

    When refilling cartridges yourself, you need to buy the right ink first. Before buying, you need to clarify the model of the printer used and nothing more. In a retail outlet that sells components for printers, sellers by model name will select the right paint.

    Attempting to fill a cartridge with non-recommended ink may result in damage to the equipment. One package of ink usually contains two containers designed for several refilling cycles.

    The procedure for refilling cartridges begins with preparing the surface of the table from ink leakage. To do this, several newspaper strips are covered on its surface, and toilet paper or cotton wool is also prepared. This precaution will help not to spoil the surface with ink, which will be very difficult to wipe off later.

    Before starting the procedure for filling ink into cartridges, you should carefully read the instructions provided. Refilling itself comes down to removing the cartridge from the printer and fixing it in a gas station. Then, using a needle attached to the ink container, the ink is gently injected into the cartridge. In the process, it is very important that the ink is injected slowly and not too much is poured.

    Once the cartridge filling procedure is completed, it is removed from the filling station and placed vertically on a surface covered with newspaper. This is done for the reason that the ink will leak for a couple of minutes. If there is too much paint or the pressure is too high, the paint takes too long to flow and should be pumped out a little through the bottom opening of the container. A second syringe is taken for this purpose, and the pumped out ink is no longer suitable for refilling.

    Once a refilled cartridge is leak free, install it in the printer and use it for its intended purpose. It often happens that on a printed sheet, a white stripe runs through the entire header. This indicates that it is necessary to clean the nozzles. It is carried out using the menu of the printer installed on the computer and is most often located in the print quality settings.

    It is worth remembering the fact that in an inkjet printer, in no case should you print with an empty cartridge, and also do not allow a long downtime of the equipment and systematically print something to prevent the cartridge head from drying out.

    You might be interested

    05/17/2023

    How images are created in printers

    Printers use a printing model to create color format images.

    05/03/2023

    New ways to reduce the cost of operating laser printers

    There are various ways to save on the operation of laser printers.

    04/13/2023

    Printer color enhancement technologies

    There are special screening methods that are used for better printing.

    03/21/2023

    Why do we need chips in cartridges

    A cartridge is considered smart if it has a chip.

    Return to list

    How to refill a printer cartridge, types of cartridges

    Cartridge refilling saves a lot on consumables. The main thing is to choose the right toner and take into account the features of brands of office equipment.

    What kind of cartridges do printers have

    By “origin” cartridges are divided into:

  • compatible;
  • restored;
  • refilled;
  • fake.
  • Genuine (OEM mark)

    Produced by the manufacturer, supplied with printers. Refueling is not provided, although it is technically possible. Some manufacturers equip the OEM with a chip to prevent reuse, but this limitation can be lifted.

    Catalog of original cartridges.

    Compatible

    Manufactured officially with manufacturer’s permission by another brand of office equipment or a company specializing in consumables for printing devices. This is a quality legal copy of the original product. The cost is lower than OEM.

    Catalog of compatible cartridges.

    Refillable

    This can be either an original or compatible cartridge without a chip, or a fake. Before buying, you should check the reputation of the seller, read the reviews. If in doubt, it’s best not to risk it.

    Remanufactured

    Cleaned and remanufactured used cartridges that can be refilled. This option is sometimes offered unofficially by employees of official services. This is a perfectly acceptable solution, provided that the cartridge is definitely not fake.

    Print cartridges

    The cartridge is a removable ink unit. Its design and type of filling depend primarily on what printing principle the printer uses. Three possible options:

    • matrix;
    • inkjet;
    • laser.

    Cartridges for dot matrix printers

    Dot matrix is ​​the first printing method mass-produced for portable devices. Suitable for texts and simple infographics. Currently, it is used very rarely and is mainly tied to solving one or two problems. For example, there are dot matrix printers for printing checks and labels.

    The dot matrix printer cartridge is an ink ribbon cassette. Officially, that is, from the point of view of the manufacturer, the entire cartridge is considered a consumable. But you can only change the tape and even apply paint to it again.

    Inkjet cartridges

    Inkjet is the second oldest and most common. It works several times slower than laser, but it produces the highest quality image with high resolution and excellent color reproduction. Therefore, inkjet printers are often chosen for the home and used in offices to print photos, booklets, posters.

    An inkjet printer cartridge is a container for liquid ink, one or more colors of ink. According to manufacturers, the cartridge should be replaced completely when the ink runs out. In fact, it is designed for a longer service life, so it is quite possible to refuel 2-3 times.

    Refilling paint immediately after it runs out increases the chance of successful refilling. The remaining ink will not have time to completely dry and become an obstacle to the passage of new toner. Therefore, it is better not to postpone refueling and do it within 1-2 days.

    Cartridges for laser printers

    Laser is the fastest way to print, which is why offices use these printers most often. The paint is used sparingly, one portion is enough for months of intensive use. However, the cartridge itself is very expensive.

    Laser Printer Cartridge – construction with photoconductor, charge and magnetic rollers, cleaning blades, two toner hoppers (life and waste). Filling is more difficult than jet. But if you know how to do it, the savings will be decent: the laser cartridge can withstand up to 15 refills.

    How to choose the ink for refilling (toner)

    1. Determine the type of printer

    Inkjet cartridges are filled with liquid ink, laser – powder toner made of polymer particles. Many manufacturers specialize in one type of ink, so you need to know in advance which printer needs toner. Then you will immediately search for the right product.

    2. Specify specifications

    The printer model, cartridge and toner markings are in the instructions or in the appendix to it. The cartridge and ink markings can be found on the cartridge itself. If for some reason it was not possible to set the ink parameters, you need to look at the options based on the characteristics of the printer and evaluating the quality of the toners.

    3. Find a major manufacturer

    Good quality toner can only be obtained from factory equipment. Such products are produced in large quantities and sold in many stores. For a sample, it is better to take a package for exactly one refill, so that you can see in practice how suitable the toner is.

    4. Inspect the packaging carefully.

    Paint must be in sealed original packaging. The label or box must indicate information about the manufacturer, date of manufacture, expiration date. The packaging must be saved so that later, when it is clear whether the print quality is satisfactory, you can buy the same brand or, if you do not like the toner, do not buy it.

    Refill features for office equipment brands

    HP

    Inkjet and laser cartridges have a chip that records the amount of toner. It does not initiate a print block, so it does not need to be reset. Sometimes printing is blocked by an application that receives information that the ink has run out and the printer cannot be used without it. To avoid this situation, you need to disconnect the printer from the computer. If this was not done before refilling the cartridge, the application must be reinstalled after refilling.

    Canon

    Canon inkjet printer ink tanks do not have holes that can be used for refilling, so you need to make them yourself. To do this, remove the sticker and find small round depressions under it (the diameter is about the same as that of a thin neck needle). In these places you need to make filling nozzles. Gently pierce the points with a medical needle. Then you can fill in the toner. To reset the chip, it will be enough to press the reset button on the printer panel.

    Samsung

    The laser cartridge must be carefully disassembled by removing the screws. One of the features of this brand of printers is the severe contamination of the blade and the waste toner compartment. The blade and compartment must be thoroughly cleaned: blow with compressed air, wipe the blade with alcohol. If this is not done, the cartridge wears out quickly and can withstand no more than 1-2 refills.

    Brother

    When disassembling the cartridge, it is better not to remove the blade, it is difficult to reinstall it correctly. To clean internal surfaces and parts, use a special vacuum cleaner. If air does not remove dirt, you can wipe the blade and lining with a smooth, lint-free cloth.

    Epson

    The manufacturer installed a chip that blocks the printer when the toner level is low. It is possible to reset the counter so that it “sees” a full cartridge only with the help of special programs and devices; it cannot be done manually. It’s easier to buy a cartridge with an already cracked chip and then refill it several times.

    Xerox

    Do not use magnetite (iron oxide) toner in an MFP with xerography module, as this will damage the module. A number of printer lines are equipped with an advanced counter that cannot be disabled manually. In general, refilling a Xerox cartridge requires special knowledge and tools.

    Tesla wall connector: Second Generation Wall Connector | Tesla

    Опубликовано: April 11, 2023 в 4:36 pm

    Автор:

    Категории: Miscellaneous

    Second Generation Wall Connector | Tesla

    Second Generation Wall Connector

    A Tesla Wall Connector is the most convenient way to charge at your home or office, with the fastest charge speeds. Simply plug in overnight and wake up to a full charge, every morning.

    To purchase a Wall Connector, visit the Tesla online store.

    Features

    • Customizable power levels, allowing installation on a range of circuit breakers
    • Compatible with 208-250 volt power supplies
    • As many as four Wall Connectors can share available power, perfect for owners with more than one Tesla or commercial installations
    • Mounted to a wall or post, the Wall Connector can be installed both indoors and outdoors
    • 48 month warranty

    For the fastest charging when charging one Tesla, install your Wall Connector with a circuit breaker to match the Onboard charger:

    Model Onboard Charger Recommended circuit breaker for installation
    Model S
    Model X
    Model 3 Performance
    Model 3 Long Range
    11. 5 kW
    (48 amp)
    60 amp circuit breaker
    Model 3 Rear-Wheel Drive 7.7 kW
    (32 amp)
    40 amp circuit breaker
    Two or more Wall Connectors
    (for power-sharing among 2+ Tesla vehicles)
    N/A 100 amp circuit breaker

    Note: Tap the lightning bolt icon on the touchscreen to view the max amperage of your vehicle.

    For unique power situations, the Wall Connector can also be installed with lower amperage circuit breakers to support almost any existing electrical system. Technical details and recharge speeds listed below:

    Wall Connector
    Technical details
    Charge speed
    Miles of range per hour of charge
    Circuit breaker
    (amps)
    Maximum output
    (amps)
    Power at 240 volts
    (kilowatt)
    Model 3
    (mph)
    Model S
    (mph)
    Model X
    (mph)
    100 80 19. 2 kW 44 34 30
    90 72 17.3 kW 44 34 30
    80 64 15.4 kW 44 34 30
    70 56 13.4 kW 44 34 30
    60 48 11.5 kW 44 34 30
    50 40 9.6 kW 37 29 25
    45 36 8.6 kW 34 26 23
    40 32 7. 7 kW 30 23 20
    35 28 6.7 kW 26 20 17
    30 24 5.7 kW 22 17 14
    25 20 4.8 kW 19 14 11
    20 16 3.8 kW 15 11 8
    15 12 2. 8 kW 11 7 5
    Wall Connector
    Technical details
    Charge speed
    Miles of range per hour of charge
    Circuit breaker
    (amps)
    Maximum output
    (amps)
    Power at 240 volts
    (kilowatt)
    Model 3
    (mph)
    Model S
    (mph)
    Model X
    (mph)
    100 80 19.2 kW 44 34 30
    90 72 17.3 kW 44 34 30
    80 64 15.4 kW 44 34 30
    70 56 13.4 kW 44 34 30
    60 48 11. 5 kW 44 34 30
    50 40 9.6 kW 37 29 25
    45 36 8.6 kW 34 26 23
    40 32 7.7 kW 30 23 20
    35 28 6.7 kW 26 20 17
    30 24 5. 7 kW 22 17 14
    25 20 4.8 kW 19 14 11
    20 16 3.8 kW 15 11 8
    15 12 2.8 kW 11 7 5

    Power sharing with multiple Wall Connectors

    Up to four Tesla Wall Connectors can be linked together to intelligently share power. This functionality is beneficial for homes or commercial locations that need to charge more than one Tesla at the same time, but may not have enough power for multiple electrical circuits.

    Higher amperage installations are recommended (but not required) when power sharing to maximize the amount of power split between each car when charging.

    Installation guides
    Current Wall Connector installation guide:

    • Second generation Wall Connector (Spring 2016 – present, ending in part number -E)

    Previous Wall Connector installation guides:

    • First generation Wall Connector (Fall 2014 – Spring 2016, ending with part number -C or -D)
    • First generation Wall Connector (Winter 2012- Fall 2014, ending with part number -A or -B)

    Back to Home Charging Overview

    Tesla May Offer a New Wall Connector: Rumors and Speculations

    By Kevin Armstrong

    Tesla may soon offer a cheaper or more powerful Wall Connector

    Tesla

    Tesla insider Chris Zheng hints at a possible new charging option for the electric vehicle giant. Tesla may be considering releasing a new home charging option, based on a tweet from the very well-informed Tesla insider Zheng.

    A new charging option could potentially make Tesla ownership even more appealing to a wider range of consumers, further solidifying the company’s place at the forefront of the EV revolution.

    Tesla Insider Chris Zheng’s Tweet

    Zheng, the same insider who reported the removal of wood trim and the new camera set up in Hardware 4, recently tweeted about the Tesla Wall Connector, hinting at a potential new offering from the company.

    Cheaper Wall Connector

    In his tweet, Zheng mentioned two possibilities: A more affordable Wall Connector: Zheng suggested that Tesla might introduce a low-price, low-power Wall Connector, which would sacrifice some of its over-the-air (OTA) capabilities. This new charging option could respond to the growing competition in the Chinese EV market, where many Tesla competitors already offer similar products. However, Zheng disapproved of this potential move, stating it was “not fun.”

    Many owners today choose to charge with Tesla’s mobile connector, a cheaper alternative. A cheaper Wall Connector could bridge the gap between the mobile connector and Tesla’s more expensive home charging solution.

    More Powerful Wall Connector

    A next-gen Wall Connector with Cybertruck-style design: Another possibility Zheng mentioned is a new, next-generation Wall Connector featuring a design inspired by the much-anticipated Tesla Cybertruck. This upgraded Connector would have a total power of 21 kW, making it a more powerful option for Tesla owners looking to charge their vehicles.

    A more powerful charging solution would likely be aimed at businesses that have access to more power and would like to provide a faster charging solution than the current Wall-Connector-based destination chargers offer. Last year Tesla introduced the ability for businesses to charge for charging through their destination chargers.

    Implications of a New Charging Option

    A new charging option could have several implications for Tesla and its customers.

    Increased affordability: If Tesla were to introduce a more affordable Wall Connector, it could make the prospect of owning a Tesla more attractive to a broader range of potential buyers. This move could help Tesla gain a competitive edge in markets where price-sensitive consumers are more likely to opt for a more affordable EV charging solution.

    Enhanced charging experience: A next-generation Connector with Cybertruck-inspired styling could create a more cohesive brand experience for Tesla owners. This new charging option could increase power and highlight the company’s commitment to innovation and design.

    Expanded market share: Offering new home charging options could help Tesla expand its market share in the global EV industry. By catering to various consumer needs and preferences, the company could attract a more diverse customer base and solidify its position as the leading EV manufacturer.

    While Tesla has not yet confirmed these rumors, it’s clear that any potential new charging options would play a significant role in the company’s growth strategy. As the EV market continues to evolve, Tesla must stay ahead of the curve by offering innovative and affordable solutions that cater to the needs of a diverse range of consumers.

    Ordering a New Tesla?

    Consider using our referral code (nuno84363) to help support our site. Model 3 and Y buyers will receive credits toward Tesla Merch, while Model S and X buyers will receive $1,000 off and 3 months of FSD for free.

    Discuss this story in our forum

    By Kevin Armstrong

    Tesla’s factory in Fremont, California

    Tesla

    Insider sources suggest that Tesla is in the initial stages of discussing a substantial automotive investment with Valencia’s regional government. While specific details remain shrouded in confidentiality agreements, Spain’s Cinco Dias has indicated that the move might involve a sprawling factory worth up to $4. 83 billion USD.

    Tesla and Spain: An Unconfirmed Courtship

    Despite the reports, there’s no concrete agreement between Tesla and Valencia, according to a statement from the Valencian government. Tesla, known for its strategic silence, has yet to comment on the speculations, and Spain’s central government has opted for a similar approach.

    Spain holds a strong position in the automotive industry as Europe’s second-largest car producer. Its recent endeavors to secure the future of EVs and batteries using European Union COVID pandemic recovery funds may make it an attractive location for Tesla. Spain’s forward-looking initiatives seem to resonate with Tesla’s ambitions, as shown by CEO Elon Musk’s past tweets about building a massive solar array in the country. However, Tesla has not officially disclosed any investment plans in Spain to date.

    Tesla’s European Strategy: An Eye on Expansion?

    Tesla’s ambitions to conquer the European market are no secret. The company’s German factory in Brandenburg is pivotal in challenging European market leader Volkswagen. Musk has hinted at the possibility of a new factory location announcement by the end of this year. The emerging reports about a potential Tesla factory in Spain could align with this timeline, especially considering Spain’s substantial automotive infrastructure, including a Ford manufacturing facility gearing up to produce electric vehicles.

    If the Valencia factory rumor is true, it would be a significant addition to Tesla’s existing manufacturing locations in the United States, China, and Germany, as well as the announced factory in Mexico. Such an expansion could ensure production efficiency and help circumvent import taxes, as noted by some industry analysts. Furthermore, the region’s automobile sector seems ready and eager to accommodate such a large-scale investment, highlighting the welcoming environment for Tesla.

    The potential move by Tesla could send ripples across the European electric vehicle market, potentially giving a major boost to Spain’s economy and the broader EU automotive industry. As companies like Volkswagen have also shown interest in investing in the area, Valencia could soon become a bustling hub for electric vehicle and battery production. The coming months will bring more clarity on these rumors and the potential impact on the global electric vehicle landscape.

    Discuss this story in our forum

    By Kevin Armstrong

    You can now view all the cameras in your Tesla

    Simon

    The latest software update from Tesla, version 2023.20.4.1, is now public and incrementally rolling out to its user base, with about 2% adoption so far. Although it appears to be a minor update on the surface, it brings several enhancements and tweaks to elevate the Tesla driving experience further.

    The key changes include the ability to preview all nine onboard cameras, modifications to the current trip odometer, and the introduction of advanced service mode menus. These improvements reflect Tesla’s continued commitment to innovation and user convenience.

    Preview All Tesla Cameras

    Earlier this year, Tesla released the 2023.2 software update, which allowed users to preview the cabin camera from within the car, an advantage that has now been extended to all nine of the vehicle’s cameras. This update in 2023.20 allows you to view the three front-facing cameras (two for HW 4.0) and other additional cameras positioned strategically around the vehicle. The comprehensive list of cameras now available for viewing includes:

    Update 2023.20.4.1

    Last updated: Jun 13, 3:00 am

    • Three front-facing cameras (main, telephoto, and wide)
    • Two “repeater” cameras on the fenders
    • Two forward-facing side cameras on the B-pillars
    • One rear-view camera
    • One cabin camera

    This is the first time that owners are able to view the vehicle’s B-pillar camera feed and the telephoto and wide-angle front-facing cameras. The other cameras were previously accessible through various methods, including the Tesla app and the Dashcam feature. To access the video feeds go to Controls > Service and tap the button to preview the cameras. You’ll be able to switch between the various cameras using the menu at the top of the camera feed.

    Camera Preview Video

    TechAU recently posted a video of the new camera preview in action.

    Here’s a video walk through of the new camera previews in 2023.20.4.1 @tesla pic.twitter.com/UKDCJ0eP0Z

    — techAU (@techAU) June 12, 2023

    Current Trip Odometer Changes

    Your ‘Current Trip’ odometer will now reflect the number of minutes driven

    @arthur_explore/Twitter

    Recent changes to Tesla’s OS changed the information that is shown for the “Current Trip” odometer in the vehicle. The Current Trip odometer began displaying distance, kilowatt-hours (kWh), and Wh/mi, the same as the other trip odometers, such as ‘Since last charge’, ‘Trip A’, and ‘Trip B’. Unfortunately, this removed the ability to view the length of your current drive. However, with the 2023.20 update, Tesla is bringing back the display of trip duration in minutes for the current trip, replacing the kWh display.

    This feature offers a more relatable metric to drivers, letting you know exactly how long you’ve been driving. The same metrics are displayed in the ‘Trips’ UI cards in the Model 3 and Model Y.

    New Service Mode Menus

    Tesla’s update 2023.20 also adds new service mode menus that we previously covered on the site, which let you view HVAC details, seat belt information and more.

    Update 2023.20 Features

    Of course, these changes are in addition to the features outlined in Tesla’s 2023.20 release notes, which include a tire service counter, tire and wheel configuration, and the availability of the larger text size option in additional languages. Users in China all receive an expanded dictionary for the Pinyin keyboard.

    Disclaimer: The Service Mode is designed for technicians or Tesla owners with a deep understanding of their vehicles. It is recommended not to make changes unless the implications are fully understood, as it may impact the vehicle negatively. Furthermore, DO NOT drive with Service Mode activated, as it deactivates critical safety features like traction control.

    Discuss this story in our forum

    Tesla News

    Confirmed by Elon

    Take a look at features that Elon Musk has said will be coming soon.

    View Upcoming Features

    Tesla Accessories
    Tesla Accessories

    10% off Tesla accessories at Tesmanian with promo code: TeslaSoftwareUpdates

    More Tesla News

    Subscribe

    Subscribe to our weekly newsletter.

    Follow Us

    Follow

    Follow

    Subscribe

    Sponsors

    Although we share official Tesla release notes, we are not affiliated with Tesla Motors. We are Tesla fans and supporters.

    SHOP

    Products Tesla_N

    • Branded fragrance

      Branded fragrance of our own production, odor resistance up to 30 days

      Price: 300 rub

    • Branded license frame

      Branded license frame of our own production from high-quality ABS plastic

      Price : 800r

    • Brand cap

      Brand cap of our own production from quality materials0003

      Price: 1. 300 RUB

    • Roadside Assistance Card

      Roadside Assistance Card will allow you to count on free assistance from our side in case of breakdown

      Price: 5.000 RUB

    Electric vehicle accessories

    • Wall mounted connector

      Tesla branded charger for electric vehicles

      0003

      Price: 15.000r

    • Home Charger

      Branded Tesla Electric Vehicle Charger

      Price: 40.000r

    • Case for Model S/X key

      Protective case for Tesla Model S/X key

      Price: from 1.500 rub

      depending on materials

    • Key card for Model 3/Y

      Original key card for Tesla Model 3/Y

      Price: 6.500 rub

      90 012

    • Original Tesla wheels 19

      Original Tesla wheels 19 radius

      003

      Price: from 150.000 rub

    • Cardholder Model 3/ Y

      Original cardholder for key cards

      0002 front trunk for all Tesla models

      Price: from 7. 000 rub

    • Сhademo

      Branded charger for electric vehicles Tesla

      Price: 75.000 rub

    • 9 0005

      Tesla jacks

      Original Tesla jacks for all models

      Price : 1.500 rub

    • Model S luggage rack

      Original trunk shelf

      for Tesla Model S

      Price: 28.000 rub

    Spare parts for electric vehicles

    • Front racks Model S

      Price: from 20.000r 0r/liter

    • Cabin filter Model 3/Y

      Price: from 2.300 r

    • Cabin filter Model S / X

      Price: from 2.700 rub

    • 3

    • Carpet holders

      Price: from 3.000r

    • Battery 12V

      Didn’t find what you were looking for?

      Request a call back from our manager and he will definitely help you

      +79231370709
      [email protected]

      Novosibirsk, Inskaya, 69

      Tilda Publishing

      ©️ 2021 TESLA-N, AVTOCOM LLC. All rights reserved.

      TESLA-N is a stand-alone, independent organization and is not directly related to Tesla, Inc. (USA) and its affiliates. The TESLA, TESLA MOTORS, TESLA ROADSTER, MODEL S, MODEL X, and “TESLA”, “T”, and “TESLA and T in Crest Shape” trademarks and logos are the property of Tesla, Inc. in the United States and/or countries.

      © Copyright 2021 TESLA-N, AUTOCOM LLC. All rights reserved.

      TESLA-N is an independent enthusiast organization and is not affiliated with Tesla, Inc. or its subsidies. TESLA, TESLA MOTORS, TESLA ROADSTER, MODEL S, MODEL X, and the “TESLA”, “T” and “TESLA and T in Crest” designs and related logos are registered trademarks of Tesla, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

      3755272 / +79231370709

      Commercial and domestic charging stations type AC: Charging station Stream AC-1-1.W.1000.1.X

      • org/ListItem”>
        home

      • Catalog

      • BYD Song Plus

      All electric vehicles have three charging modes, which can be conditionally divided into slow (AC household charging type), fast (AC professional charging type) and fast (DC professional charging type).

      22 kW, 1 socket, IEC 62196-2 Type 2 (Mennekes), wall mount, IP55

      Can be installed in open/closed car parks, car parks. Both wall mounting and stationary on a support are possible. The installation requires a supply of electrical energy. For the operator (station owner) it allows remote monitoring and control of the charging process, keeping records of the consumed electricity.

      Type charging station
      Input voltage

      3 x 380 V
      Power output

      22 kW
      Current 32 A
      Number of power sockets

      1 pc.
      Power connector

      IEC 62196-2 Type 2 (Mennekes)
      Power connector type socket
      Power standard

      IEC-61851-1 Mode 3
      Electromagnetic connector lock +
      Assembly wall
      Protection class

      IP55
      Anti-vandal housing

      Energy meter

      1
      LCD screen

      Short circuit protection

      +
      Leakage current protection (RCD)

      +
      Access control and management system

      RFID, Ethernet port (GSM module optional)
      Color white

      Dimensions and weights

      Length 16. 5 cm
      Width 35 cm
      Height 45 cm

      The first, easiest and most affordable way to charge your electric vehicle is to plug into a standard 230V AC household outlet that must be grounded. Otherwise, the electric car simply will not start the charging session and will give an error. This requirement is “hardwired” into the software of the on-board charger and is dictated by safety considerations to exclude the possibility of electric shock to a person during the charging of an electric vehicle. With this charging method, it will take approximately 8 hours to charge a 24 kW battery. 100% (Nissan Leaf 2013-2017 standard battery). The charging speed is limited by the power of the conventional network, which is 3.6 kW (Mode 1/2). The package of all electric vehicles includes a regular charger for just such charging at home, usually in a personal garage or parking lot.

      The second type is an accelerated charging with alternating current (AC professional Mode 3) through special devices – charging stations. In this case, the electric car is charged with a stronger current of 32A and the charging power increases to 7.2 kW with a single-phase connection and up to 22 kW with a three-phase connection. A standard Nissan Leaf battery can be charged in as little as 4 hours. There is an American (aka Japanese) SAE J1772 TYPE 1 charging connector, which is designed only for a single-phase network, and a universal European connector IEC 62196-2 Mennekes TYPE 2, which allows you to charge an electric car from both single-phase and three-phase networks.

      Chargers of this type are installed in public parking lots of shopping centers, in public places, near business centers – where the owner of an electric car spends several hours, sufficient to charge the battery for 100-150 km. move. Household versions with a power of 7.2 kW are widely used to speed up the charging process in their own garages or parking lots.

      Third type – fast DC charging (DC professional Mode 4), at special charging stations with a capacity of 50-150 kW, with the ability to charge a standard Nissan Leaf battery to 80% capacity in just 30-40 minutes (100% charging at DC stations is impractical due to the non-linear charge rate of the battery and its significant overheating with increasing charging time.In addition, incomplete DC charging significantly extends battery life). For DC charging, the electric vehicle must be equipped with a connector of the appropriate standard, which is different from the slow and fast charging ports. There is an American (aka Japanese) CHAdeMO charging connector and a European CCS Combo connector.

      In Belarus, the national operator of this type of chargers is Belorusneft, which installs DC-type chargers at its branded gas stations and public parking lots of shopping centers, for example, near ProStore hypermarkets. Their purpose is the maximum replenishment of the electric car battery in 30-40 minutes, which the owner can spend at the gas station without significant damage to his time.

    Page 2 of 3
    1 2 3
    Home
    Uncategorized

    Upper Darby High School
    Robotics & Engineering Team

    601 N. Lansdowne Avenue
    Drexel Hill, PA 19026